FIELD INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF COASTAL ALASKA

advertisement

FIELD INSTRUCTIONS

FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF

COASTAL ALASKA

2004

Forest Inventory and Analysis Program

Pacific Northwest Research Station

USDA Forest Service i

ii

FIELD INSTRUCTIONS

FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF

COASTAL ALASKA

2004

Based on version 2.0 of the National CORE Field Guide iii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

I. INTRODUCTION…………………………………………………………………..1

III. PLOT LAYOUT AND REFERENCING…………………………………………11

IV. PLOT LEVEL DATA………………………………………………………………17

VII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA…………………………………………………….66

IX. CROWNS: MEASUREMENTS AND SAMPLING……………………………..93

XII. LASER 200 INSTRUCTIONS……………………………………………………147

XIII. APPENDICES…………………………………………………………………......149

iv

Annual Inventory 2004

I. INTRODUCTION

I. INTRODUCTION

This field guide documents the procedures by the Forest Inventory and Analysis Program (FIA) in the 2004 annual inventory of coastal Alaska.

FIA, a program within the Pacific Northwest Research Station (PNW), USDA Forest Service, is one of five Forest

Inventory and Analysis work units across the United States. PNW-FIA is responsible for inventorying the forest resources of Alaska, California, Hawaii, Oregon, Pacific Islands, and Washington.

Purposes of this field guide

This field guide serves two purposes, to:

• instruct field personnel in how to locate and measure field plots in the 2004 annual inventory of coastal Alaska.

• document the field procedures, methods, and codes used in the inventory.

Organization of this field guide

This field guide is structured primarily for use by field personnel. Each chapter corresponds either to a separate function that must be performed in locating and measuring a field plot, or to a particular aspect of data recording that must be completed.

The procedures in this field guide are ordered to coincide as much as possible with the order in which field data items are collected and entered into the field data recorder. Some procedures and codes are repeated in multiple chapters of the field guide to minimize the need to refer to additional chapters while collecting data in the standard order.

This field guide incorporates the field data collection procedures of the Forest Inventory and Analysis National

CORE Field Guide. Instructions in shaded text, and data items in all capital letters describe data items or field procedures that are a part of (or similarly related to) that guide. Several of those items are still under development, or have unresolved issues at the time of this printing. Temporary regional adjustments and clarifications are noted in italic font within the shaded text. Portions of this field guide which are not shaded are regional variables or procedures which supplement the national core data.

Information that is infrequently used or that is included only for documentation, as well as a glossary of terms, is included in the appendices at the end of this field guide.

Products

PNW-FIA provides information needed by resource planners, policy analysts, and others involved in forest resource decision-making. Data collected in PNW-FIA inventories is summarized, interpreted, analyzed, and published in statistical and analytical reports of national, state, and subregional scope. PNW-FIA publishes information on area by forest land and owner classes and by degree of urbanization; land use change; timber volume, growth, mortality, and removals; potential forest productivity; opportunities for silvicultural treatment; and kinds of area for wildlife habitats. PNW-FIA also provides data to answer questions about forest resources.

Research topics

The data collected in these inventories represent a wealth of information for both applied and basic questions concerning forest ecosystems. Topics include: the distribution of plant species and their relationship to environment, the incidence of insects and disease in relation to forest type and condition, changes in forest structure in productivity due to disturbance, and improved prediction of forest growth and development on different sites and in response to management.

1

Annual Inventory 2004

I. INTRODUCTION

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The CORE field plot consists of four subplots approximately 1/24 acre in size with a radius of 24.0 feet. The center subplot is subplot 1. Subplots 2, 3, and 4 are located 120.0 feet horizontal (+/- 7 feet) at azimuths of 360, 120, and

240 degrees, respectively, from the center of subplot 1 (see figure below). Subplots are used to collect data on trees with a diameter (at breast height "DBH") of 5.0 inches or greater. Throughout this field guide, use of the word

“' plot ”' refers to the entire set of four subplots. “ Plot center ” is defined as the center of subplot 1.

Each subplot contains a microplot of approximately 1/300 acre in size with a radius of 6.8 feet. The center of the microplot is offset 90 degrees and 12.0 feet horizontal (+/- 1 foot) from each subplot center. Microplots are numbered in the same way as subplots. Microplots are used to select and collect data on saplings (DBH of 1.0 inch through 4.9 inches) and seedlings [DBH less than 1.0 inch in diameter and greater than 0.5 foot in length

(conifers) or greater than 1.0 foot in length (hardwoods)].

From To

Subplot 1 Subplot 2 120.0 ft.

Subplot 1

Subplot 1

Subplot 2

Subplot 2

Subplot 3

Subplot 3

Subplot 4

Subplot 3

Subplot 4

Subplot 4

120.0 ft.

120.0 ft.

207.8 ft.

207.8 ft.

207.8 ft.

360

120

240

150

210

270

2

Annual Inventory 2004

I. INTRODUCTION

UNITS OF MEASURE

The field guide will use ENGLISH units as the measurement system.

All azimuths will be magnetic (no declination)

Plot Dimensions:

Subplot - for selecting trees with diameter ≥ 5.0 inches

Radius = 24.0 feet

Area = 1,809.56 square feet or approximately 0.04 acre or approximately 1/24 acre

Microplot - for counting seedlings and selecting saplings

Radius = 6.8 feet

Area = 145.27 square feet or approximately 0.003 acre or approximately 1/300 acre

The distance between subplot centers is 120.0 feet horizontal.

The minimum area needed to qualify as accessible forest land is 1.0 acre.

The minimum width to qualify as accessible forest land is 120.0 feet.

Tree Limiting Dimensions:

Stump

Merchantable DOB

Minimum conifer seedling length

Minimum hardwood seedling length

0.5 foot

1.0 foot

Seedling/sapling DBH break break

1.0 inch DOB

5.0

Data are collected on field plots at the following levels:

Data that describe the entire cluster of four subplots. Plot

Subplot Data that describe a single subplot of a cluster.

Condition Class A discrete combination of landscape attributes that describe the environment on all or part of the plot. These attributes include CONDITION CLASS STATUS, RESERVED

STATUS, OWNER GROUP, FOREST TYPE, STAND SIZE CLASS, REGENERATION

STATUS, and TREE DENSITY.

Boundary An approximate description of the demarcation line between two condition classes that occur on a single subplot or microplot plot. There is no boundary recorded when the demarcation occurs beyond the fixed radius plots.

Tree Data describing saplings with a diameter 1.0 inch through 4.9 inches, and trees with diameter greater than or equal to 5.0 inches

Seedling Data describing trees with a diameter less than 1.0 inch and greater than or equal to 0.5 foot in length (conifers) or greater than or equal to 1.0 foot in length (hardwoods).

Site Tree Data describing site index trees

3

Annual Inventory 2004

II. LOCATING THE PLOT

II. LOCATING THE PLOT

Table of Contents

Locating the plot on the ground………………………………………….5

Plots with active logging

A. First time visit to the field sample location…………………………..5

1. Locating the field sample location

2. Establishing the Photo Scale Reciprocal

3. Establishing a Base Line Azimuth…………………………………6

4. Reference Point to Plot Center Measurements

Azimuth

Ground

B. Re-visit of the field sample location………………………………….7

Reverse RP method

RP locator key……………………………………………………….8

PC locator key……………………………………………………….9

Replacement Plot (Lost Plot)…………………………………………….9

4

Annual Inventory 2004

II. LOCATING THE PLOT

II. LOCATING THE PLOT

Locating the Plot on the Ground

Establishing the location is the crucial first step in collecting valid field data. While measurements at each location are used to collect statistical information for the entire inventory unit, each location is also compared to satellite information for the same point. Because these sampling layers must measure attributes on the same location, it is critical that the ground sample be located as accurately as possible.

Plots with active logging

If the plot area is being logged (timber is being felled, bucked, or yarded) or is unsafe to visit because of active logging, DO NOT ESTABLISH THE PLOT !

Note on the plot folder the status of the logging operation and return the plot to the unit coordinator. Proceed to an alternate plot if available.

Using a map, ortho photos, aerial photos, and a GPS unit, the first task is to find the ground location of the plot center (PC) delineated on the photos. All ground locations will be located from a reference point (RP) so that the location can be found during future remeasurements. At some locations, the PC can also be located on the ground visually without chaining from an RP.

Some areas of Alaska have very poor or limited air photo coverage. Typically crews will have plenty of time to evaluate air photography and plan their approach to plot prior to departing. If your photography looks suspect or you have doubt in your ability to follow the procedures outlined here due to poor photo quality, please get advice from experienced crew leaders and/or the unit coordinator prior to departing. In some extreme cases, travel to plot will be performed with only a GPS using previous or new plot coordinates.

The plot sampling for 2004 is considered a re-measurement; as many of the previously installed periodic locations will be re-visited. However, there were some differences in the cross-over from the periodic vs. annual plot location grid. These “differences” created a number of unsampled plots that will be visited and installed for the first time.

Thus, for the field season 2004 the following types of plot location and installation methods will be encountered:

ƒ First time visit to the field sample location (initial installation)

ƒ Re-visit of the field sample location (previous installation)

Follow the appropriate steps outlined below to correctly locate, reference, and install the plot:

A. First time visit to the field sample location

1. Locating the Field Sample Location (Using Ortho Photos or CIR Aerial Photos)

Normally the field crew will establish the sample location using ortho photos. On occasion the ortho photos will not be adequate for establishing the location and a color infra red aerial photo (CIR) will be used instead. The procedures for using either medium are similar but the CIRs require additional steps for scaling and orientation. To accurately establish the field location the crew will need to know:

- Photo scale reciprocal to determine ground distances off the photo

- Azimuth to determine directions off the photo

2. Establishing the Photo Scale Reciprocal (PSR)

Ortho Photos : If using the ortho photos, the scale is already available (and is usually printed on the photo). The ortho photos have been printed at a scale of 1:15840 unless noted otherwise. For photos with a given scale,

PSR = Scale (ex. For 1:15840, PSR = 15840) Take the PSR determined here and plug it into the equation in

Ground Distance below.

CIR Photos: If there is not enough detail on the ortho photo then the color infrared (CIR) print can be scaled by using information from the ortho photo or measuring objects on the ground. The PSR’s obtained here will be used in the formula under section 4 below.

5

Annual Inventory 2004

II. LOCATING THE PLOT

To obtain photo scale reciprocal ( PSR ) for the CIR photos using the ortho photo , do the following:

⇒ Locate two points on the aerial CIR photo that can also be located on the ortho photo and pinprick them on the CIR. The two objects should be at least one centimeter apart.

⇒ Using a millimeter scale, measure the distance between the points on each of the photos in meters (1mm

=.001m).

⇒ Use the following formula to obtain the PSR:

Photo Scale Reciproca l =

Ortho

CIR

Distance ×

15840

Distance

To obtain PSR for the CIR photos using ground objects , do the following:

⇒ Locate two points on the aerial photo (CIR) that can also be located on the ground and pinprick them on the CIR. The two objects should be at least 1/2 centimeter apart on the photo.

⇒ With a 100 foot tape, measure the distance between the objects on the ground to the nearest 1 foot

(Ground Distance), and with a millimeter scale (1 mm = 0.001 meters), measure the distance between the objects on the CIR (CIR Distance). Both distances need to be in meters; so the ground measurement will require a conversion from feet to meters. Multiply the ground distance (English) by 0.3048

to convert from feet to meters.

⇒ Use the following formula to calculate the PSR:

Photo Scale Reciproca l =

Ground distance

CIR distance

3. Establishing a Base Line Azimuth

Ortho Photos: When using supplied ortho photos, the azimuth for a baseline on the photo can be found on the plot location folder. For locations visited in 1996 and later, the baseline azimuth is magnetic, with declination based on current World Aeronautical Charts (CD-12 & CE-15). If the orientation of the ortho-photo baseline is in question, note that sample location names are always printed so that when the label is properly oriented, the top of the ortho map is “north.” If a baseline arrow/grid is not present the edges of the image can be used to indicate the given baseline azimuth.

CIR Photos: For CIR photos, the base line azimuth, like photo scale, can be obtained by one of two methods: using the ortho photo or measuring between points on the ground.

To obtain an azimuth for the CIR photos using the ortho photo , do the following:

⇒ Visually but accurately transfer the true north baseline from the ortho photo to the CIR photo and then subtract the declination from 360

°

to get the magnetic azimuth.

⇒ Record this azimuth on the photo.

To obtain an azimuth for the CIR photos using ground measurements , do the following:

⇒ Select two points within sight of each other that can also be seen on the CIR. Pinprick these points and draw a line between them (a “base line”).

⇒ On the ground, sight between the two objects and record the magnetic azimuth on the CIR photo.

4. Reference Point (RP) to Plot Center (PC) Measurements

Azimuth

⇒ With the aid of a stereo scope, locate the RP on the CIR and pinprick it on the ortho photo (or use the ortho photo to locate the RP, if possible). Describe the RP on the location record as well as circling and labeling the pinprick on the back of the ortho photo.

6

Annual Inventory 2004

II. LOCATING THE PLOT

⇒ Draw a line between the RP and the PC that also intersects the baseline (described above). If the RP-PC line does not intersect the baseline, then a third line intersecting the baseline at a 90

°

angle can be drawn and its azimuth determined by placing the center of a photo protractor at the intersection of the new line and the baseline, turning the protractor so that the proper azimuth on the protractor is lined up with the baseline and then reading the new azimuth. The new line now becomes the baseline.

⇒ Determine the direction from the RP to the PC by placing the center of the photo protractor at the intersection of the baseline/RP-PC lines. Turn the protractor so that the baseline azimuth on the protractor is lined up with the baseline.

⇒ Read the RP-PC azimuth off the protractor and record it on the back of the photo.

Ground Distance

- Measure the photo distance (PD) between the RP and PC using a millimeter scale (record in meters, 1 mm =.001 m) and plug it into the formula below.

- Take the PSR (as determined from the methods in section 1 above) and plug into the formula below.

- Calculate the ground distance using the following formula:

Ground Distance = Photo Distance(meters) x PSR x 3.2808

Here is an example of this formula in action:

Photo Distance (ie. RP to PC on the photo) = 5 mm or 0.005 meters Photo Scale Reciprocal = 15840

Thus, 0.005 x 15840 x 3.2808 = 259.839 feet. Round up to the nearest foot

NOTE: All of these calculations need to be written out in full on the back of the photo.

⇒ Collect all other necessary information for the RP and monument accordingly (see next chapter).

⇒ Using compass and tape, measure out the computed ground distance, correcting for slope, between the

RP and PC. Measure from the face of the RP to the PC

B. Re-visit of the field sample location

The first step in re-locating a previously installed plot is to find the old RP. From the LZ/Truck parking spot use photos, written descriptions, maps/drawings, and/or GPS coordinates to find the old RP.

NOTE: If the Plot Center location is found by the crew, remeasurements will be carried out at that location regardless of any error in installation from the previous visit. The use of notes to describe previous installation errors is mandatory! A new RP may be needed as well, so use the best method below to establish one.

In all situations where a crew is chaining to PC (whether from an old or new RP) the end of the chain should be marked with flagging and/or a temporary plot pin. This will allow for describing error (hor dist and azm) from the end of chain to the PC in the location record notes. Also, if the PC cannot be found and the chain ends in the correct location (after photo verification and a decent search of the surrounding area) then a replacement plot (see

Replacement Plot on page 9) will need to be established at the end of chain.

Reverse RP method

In some situations the RP may not be found (or there is no suitable replacement nearby), but the PC is found by the crew. After remeasuring the plot, crews should create a new RP (time permitting) using the following methods:

1. If GPS coverage is very good, then locate new RP (preferably somewhere between the LZ and PC and it should be visible [and thus pinpricked] on the photo). Then use the navigation function on the GPS receiver to get an azimuth/horizontal distance from the new RP to the collected PC coordinates. Record all the usual RP data on the location record, in the data recorder, and on the RP tags. However, describe in the RP section of the location record the method used to get the azm/hor dist from RP to PC.

2. If GPS coverage is poor, then pinprick the location of the new RP on the best photos available (same photos as the PC pinprick). Using the methods in section A (page 5) to determine the distance and azimuth from RP to PC.

However, do not chain to PC (unless you have adequate time). Record all the usual RP data on the location record,

7

Annual Inventory 2004

II. LOCATING THE PLOT in the data recorder, and on the RP tags. However, describe in the RP section of the location record the method used to get the azm/hor dist from RP to PC.

Use the two Keys below as a general guide for dealing with some of the many possible situations that could be encountered by field crews attempting to relocate Reference Points and the Plot Center. There is no real way to cover every possible situation, so professional judgment and common sense should be the rule for any situation not covered. Also, remember to always document with detailed written notes anything that can help in relocating either the Reference Point or the Plot Center.

RP Locator Key

RP Found

RP suitable for reuse

1. Make sure data between RP tags and location record match

2. Replace tags not likely to survive another 10 years with new tags (English units)

3. Chain to Plot Center (PC) [see PC key below]

RP NOT suitable for reuse

Suitable new RP nearby

1. -If the distance between the old and new RP is less than 10 feet, then use same

data as the old RP (converted to English units, with new dbh and species as needed).

Use notes to describe general location from new to old RP (ex. 5 feet at 170 deg).

-If the distance between the old and new RP is greater than 10 feet, write all standard

RP data (species, diam, etc.) from the new RP to the old in the location record

notes (first line of RP location & description). New RP tags will have horizontal distance

and azimuth to old RP etched into them (English units). Use of notes in this situation is

critical.

RP NOT Found

2. Chain to PC from old RP [see PC key below]

Suitable new RP NOT nearby

1. Chain to PC from old RP [see PC key below]

Try to find the Plot Center using photos, written descriptions/maps, and/or GPS coordinates (new RP installed after plot data collected).

If the distance to PC from the RP is far (thousands of feet), then you may want to create a new RP and figure out new distance/azimuth to PC (using techniques in section A above). If this method is chosen by the crew leader, care must be taken to assure that the PC can be found at the end of the chain. Again, it is very important to write down notes describing the procedures used by the crew to relocate (or attempts to relocate) Plot Center. Chain to PC from new RP [see PC key below]

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

8

Annual Inventory 2004

II. LOCATING THE PLOT

PC Locator Key

PC Found

Replace PC witness trees as needed (see Witness Trees next chapter) and remeasure plot. If PC was found and the RP is missing or not suitable, then use Reverse RP method shown at the beginning of section B (above).

If the PC is found, but the end of the chain from RP lies greater than 30 feet from the PC plot pin, then add notes describing the horizontal distance/azimuth from end of chain to PC plot pin.

PC NOT Found

1. Begin a spiral search from the end of chain (from RP); extend up to 200 feet in radius (terrain permitting).

2. At same time, use all photos, drawings/maps, previous data, and/or GPS coordinates to aid in relocating.

3. If the end of chain does not appear to be at the PC photo pinprick, then use photos to find the pinprick

location visually on the ground. If the ground location of the pinprick is found then begin a spiral search

of that area, extending up to 200 feet in radius.

4. REMEMBER: If the previous plot is found by the field crew (whether it is right on, or 500 ft in error) the

plot will be remeasured in the place it was installed. Notes are required with previous error situations;

this will aid future crews when relocating PC locations.

5. If no trace of the previous plot can be found after using steps 1-3, then treat as lost plot and begin

Replacement Plot procedures below.

Replacement Plot (Lost Plot)

If no sign of the plot can be found after an extensive search using all the data available, then the plot will be considered lost. Once the crew leader determines that the plot is lost, then a replacement plot will need to be installed. Plot locating and layout should be performed as if installing the plot for the first time. Use the following steps to correctly account for the lost plot, and to create a replacement plot:

1. The downloaded plot file (lost plot) should be activated in the “Plot Menu” using the following codes: a) STATE = 02, PLOT NUMBER = xxxxx, and QA STATUS = 1 (where xxxxx is the lost plot number) b) From the “Plot Menu” screen enter “Plot lvl data” then enter “1 - Plot Attributes”

2. Enter the following in the “Plot Attributes” screen:

SAMPLE KIND = 2 (Remeasurement Plot)

DATA SOURCE = 1 (Ground Visit)

PLOT STATUS = 3 (Nonsampled)

PLOT NONSAMPLED REASON = 06 (Lost Plot)

CONDITION CLASS STATUS 1 = 5 (Nonsampled)

ESTIMATED NONSAMPLE LAND COVER TYPE = XXX (see Item 9 in Plot Level Data chapter)

PLOT LEVEL NOTES = Plot is Lost, amount of time searching, etc.

The lost (old) plot is then edited/closed. Be sure to include descriptive notes on the location record explaining how and why the plot could not be relocated.

3. Start a new plot file (replacement plot) using the following codes prior to entering the “Plot Menu”:

STATE = 02, PLOT NUMBER = 99999, QA STATUS = 1

NOTE: PLOT NUMBER will remain 99999 until returning to the field office, there an IM team member or a field supervisor will assist in renaming the plot file with the next available number on the coastal unit plot number list.

4. The replacement plot is treated as a new (1 st time visit) plot overall. However, certain Items in the “Plot

Attributes” screen need to be coded with the following:

9

Annual Inventory 2004

II. LOCATING THE PLOT

SAMPLE KIND = 3 (Replacement Plot)

PREVIOUS PLOT NUMBER = XXXXX (where xxxxx is the lost plot number)

P2/P3 PLOT TYPE = 0 (P2 Plot) or 1 (P2/P3 Plot)

NOTE : If “P3” is printed on the old (lost) plot folder label, then enter a 1 for this Item. If there is no “P3” on the label, then it is considered a P2 only and 0 should be entered. It is very important that the proper code be selected so that the crew can access all of the appropriate data entry screens (whether they are P2 or P3 screens).

10

Annual Inventory 2004

III. PLOT LAYOUT AND REFERENCING

III. PLOT LAYOUT AND REFERENCING

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2. Monumenting the Plot Center (PC)

4. Plot

13

MQO’s

11

Annual Inventory 2004

III. PLOT LAYOUT AND REFERENCING

III. PLOT LAYOUT AND REFERENCING

1. The Reference Point (RP)

The RP references the plot pin in the ground (typically at the center of subplot 1, a.k.a. PC). It is an object (usually a tree) that is prominent, apt to be present at next visit, and easily located on the ground. Do not reference a subplot other than subplot 1 just because that subplot is closer to the RP. Reference another subplot only when there is a significant obstacle or other obstruction between the RP and Subplot 1, but not between the RP and the other subplot chosen.

Selecting the RP: The RP should be distinctive on both the ground and on the new photos. You may reuse the previous RP tree if it is suitable. If the old RP tree is dead, missing, or difficult to identify on the ground or plot photo, select a new RP (but leave the tags on the old RP). If possible, it should be a tree that is not likely to die or be cut before the next inventory. You may select a snag or other object for an RP (i.e., a shrub, large boulder, or other distinctive object etc.). If you utilize such an RP, describe it on the back of the plot photo and in "RP Location

& Description" on the location record.

Tag the RP: Mark the RP tree with three new tags. If using the same RP as last visit, then leave old tags even though new tags are being applied. Write out (etch) the appropriate information required on all three aluminum square tags. Then nail both tags 6 feet above ground line, one facing the direction you expect future crews to approach the RP (typically from the LZ), the other facing the direction of Plot Center (PC). Nail the third aluminum square tag below stump height, on the side of the tree facing Plot Center (PC). When attaching a tag, drive the nail into the tree only enough to anchor the nail firmly into the wood. If the RP is a building, rock, or other item that cannot/should not be tagged, make a note in the "RP Location Description" (on the location record) and in the AK

RP Notes, that it is not tagged and a description.

Pinprick the RP location: For all plots pinprick the ground location of the RP on the new photo. When the plot is being installed for the first time use the RP and PC pinpricks to calculate the correct horizontal distance and azimuth between them (see previous chapter, Locating the Plot).

Record RP data: Record the species of the RP, it's d.b.h. to the nearest inch, azimuth FROM RP to plot pin, and horizontal distance measured (to the nearest foot) from the square tag at the base of the RP to the plot pin. Record

12

Annual Inventory 2004

III. PLOT LAYOUT AND REFERENCING this on the back of the aerial photo, etch it in the required information on the square aluminum tags placed on the

RP, record under RP Data on the location record, and in the RP information screen in the data recorder. In

“Location Description" on the location record, write any information that would aid the next crew in relocating the plot. Describe prominent features present in the plot area that are unlikely to change in the next ten years; examples include details such as slope, aspect, topographic position, recognizable physiographic features (ie. streams, rock outcrops, benches), man-made features, and unusual or large trees. If any new roads have been built in the plot area since the date of the new field photos, sketch them on the location record, if it will help the next crew to find the plot.

Route to RP:

Record a clear and concise narrative for the travel route to the RP in the space provided on the location record.

Begin at a permanent starting point. The term “starting point” is somewhat ambiguous. Normally the starting point is a landing zone (LZ), arterial or secondary road junction. In some cases (eg. wilderness access) the starting point may be a trailhead, or the end of a local road. Whatever starting point is selected, it should be easily identifiable from the map, aerial photo (if there is photo coverage of the starting point), and on the ground. The narrative for the route to RP shall identify the mode of travel (driving, hiking, flagging, etc.), route traveled (include road and/or trail designation number), direction of travel (use cardinal directions), and the distance traveled on each segment.

2. Monumenting Plot Center (PC)

Before monumenting, see if an exception (below) qualifies first. NOTE: all old PC and subplot center pins

(regardless of color or condition) should be replaced with the new white fiberglass plot pins and taken back to the field office as garbage.

An exception

The plot center monument is not placed at the center of subplot 1 (Plot Center) if either of the following situations occurs: a) The center of subplot 1 is too hazardous to visit (examples: subplot center 1 is in the middle of a pond, or the middle of a freeway, or on the side of a cliff)

OR b) Placing the plot center monument at the center of subplot 1 is very apt to irritate a landowner (example: subplot center 1 is in the middle of someone's front lawn).

If the exception applies, witness the center of the lowest-numbered subplot on the standard layout that has an accessible forest land condition class present within its 24.0-foot fixed-radius plot.

Specifically, do the following steps: a) Place white plot pin at the center of this subplot, remove old subplot center pin. b) Witness the new plot pin to two nearby trees; see "Witnessing the Plot Center" on page 14. c) Reference the new plot pin to an RP; see "The Reference Point (RP)" on page 12. d) If a revisited plot, determine and pinprick the location of the field sample location on the new photos using photo interpretation. On all plots: use a sharpie to circle the pinprick on the back of the photo and write

"PC" (plot center) and the plot number near the circle.

NOTE: If one of these exceptions applies, then the subplot being referenced is not the center of the plot (subplot 1).

Notes in the location record are required to inform future crews of this situation and to notify them which subplot is being referenced by the RP.

Standard Monumenting (Exception above does not qualify)

Do the following steps: a) Install a white plot pin at this location on the ground and tie a piece of flagging to it. The pin should be inserted into the ground far enough to leave about 1/3 visible (about 5-7 inches, soil permitting). On remeasurement plots, if the previous PC plot pin is recovered intact, replace it with the new white pin, taking old one back to field office as garbage. b) Witness the new plot pin to two nearby trees; see "Witness Trees" on page 14. c) Make sure the new plot pin is referenced to an RP; see "The Reference Point (RP)" on page 12. d) Circle the pinprick with a sharpie on the back of the photo and write "PC" (plot center) and the plot number near the circle.

13

Annual Inventory 2004

III. PLOT LAYOUT AND REFERENCING

3. Witness Trees

Witnessing the Plot Center (PC)

To witness the plot center pin with nearby trees, do the following steps: a) Select two trees near the plot center monument that form, as closely as possible, a right angle with the white colored plot center pin. For remeasurement plots, remove all old square witness tags, regardless of whether the witness is being replaced or not. All new PC witness tags shall be recorded in English units and the distance will be slope from the bottom nail head to PC pin. If live trees are not available, use stumps or sound snags. b) Write out the required information onto the square aluminum tags for each of the witness trees (2 tags per tree). c) Nail the appropriate square aluminum tag in two locations on each witness tree; one well below stump height (<

0.5 foot above the ground), the other approximately 6 feet from ground level. Both should be on the side facing the plot center pin. When attaching a tag, drive the nail into the tree only enough to anchor the nail firmly into the wood. Slide the tags out as far as possible from the bark surface and bend the corners over the nails (this helps keep the tag from being “swallowed” as the tree grows). d) If a stump: If the witness is a stump < 4.5 ft tall, nail an aluminum square tag at the base facing subplot center, also attach an additional square tag to the top of the stump. If the stump is not a tally tree, record "stump" in the tree comment. When nailing tags to stumps, pound the nail in flush to the bole. Tags nailed to stumps stay attached longer if the bark is removed prior to nailing the tag in. e) If another object: If the witness is a shrub, nail or wire an aluminum square tag to the base of the shrub facing subplot center. If possible, nail or wire an additional square tag higher up which faces the direction you expect future crews to approach the subplot. If the witness is another object (rock, etc.), monument and tag as appropriate. In both cases record comments in the “tree notes” section.

Witnessing subplots (non-PC)

Select 2 trees near the pin that form, as closely as possible, a right angle with the pin. If trees are not available, use stumps or sound snags. If the witness is not a tree, follow procedures shown in c) below. On subplots established previously, reuse the previous witness trees, or if there are better trees available, use new witness trees. Renew old witness tags as needed. a) For all trees: Nail an aluminum round (yellow side out) 6 feet above ground facing the direction you expect future crews to approach the subplot, and nail an aluminum round tag below stump height facing subplot

14

Annual Inventory 2004

III. PLOT LAYOUT AND REFERENCING center. If the witness is a live tally tree with a diameter 3.0 in. d.b.h. or larger, mark where diameter is measured with an aluminum nail. If it is not a tally tree, then no dbh nail is required (however, the tags are still required). When attaching a round tag, drive the nail into the tree only enough to anchor the nail firmly into the wood. b) If a stump: If the witness is a stump < 4.5 ft tall, nail an aluminum round at the base facing subplot center, also attach an additional aluminum round tag to the top of the stump. If the stump is not a tally tree, record "stump" in the tree comment. When nailing tags to stumps, pound the nail in flush to the bole. Tags nailed to stumps stay attached longer if the bark is removed prior to nailing the tag in. c) If another object: If the witness is a shrub, nail or wire an aluminum round tag to the base of the shrub facing subplot center. If possible, nail or wire an additional round higher up which faces the direction you expect future crews to approach the subplot. If the witness is another object, monument and tag as appropriate. In both cases record comments in the subplot notes and on the location record

4. Other Plot Monumentation Notes

GPS Coordinates

The following locations on the ground will require the collecting of GPS coordinates (stored as waypoints):

LZ/TR (landing zone/truck parking)

RP (reference

PC (plot or (one of the other subplots if center of plot is not accessible)

See GPS INFO on page 26 for the specific items to be entered into the field data recorder.

See chapter XI. COORDINATES (GPS) on page 141 for setting up and using the Magellan GPS receivers.

Locating the microplot

The center of each 6.8-foot microplot is located 12 feet from each subplot center at 90 degrees. Mark each microplot with a yellow plot pin at microplot center, and tie a piece of flagging to the pin. The pin should be inserted into the ground far enough to leave about 1/3 visible (about 5-7 inches, soil permitting). This will ensure the best chance at relocating the pin (still in the ground) with future field visits.

Maintaining Plot Integrity

Each crew is responsible for preventing unnecessary damage to current or prospective sample trees, saplings, seedlings, and other resources. Because plots will be remeasured in the future, it is desirable to ensure that observed changes are representative of the landscape as a whole and not due to activities of a previous field crew.

The following activities are allowed subject to conditions from the landowner / managing agency. For example agencies that manage wilderness areas may request that tree tags not be used because they detract from the

“wilderness experience” of recreationists. Always check the plot folder or with your field supervisor for special instructions prior to beginning inventory procedures. The following field procedures are permitted unless stated otherwise.

• Nailing tags on reference and witness trees so that the RP and PC can be relocated.

• Boring of trees for age and radial growth to determine tree age, site index, stand age, or for other reasons.

• Nailing, tagging, and marking trees and saplings to aid in relocating, identifying, and remeasurement.

The following practices are specifically prohibited within the entire plot area including all four points. This area is defined as a 150 foot radius circle around the PC:

• Collecting natural artifacts such as stem burls, antlers, cones, bird nests, etc is prohibited.

Removal of stem burls creates open wounds on trees that may allow greater opportunity for disease or insect attack. Removal of other items may alter natural ecological patterns.

15

Annual Inventory 2004

III. PLOT LAYOUT AND REFERENCING

• Building fires is prohibited.

Hot prolonged fires can kill soil microorganisms thus sterilizing the soil. Additionally, the amount of down wood on the plot is altered.

• Excessive limb removal is discouraged.

It is recognized that it is necessary to remove dead limbs from some species such as spruce but remove the absolute minimum. Removal of live limbs is strictly prohibited as it reduces plant vigor and open wounds provide opportunity for insect and disease attack. Limbs should not be removed on witness and reference trees to facilitate observation of tags with the exception of trees located off-plot (>150 feet

from

• Discarding trash is strictly prohibited.

This includes biodegradable items such as apple cores and grape seeds. These items have the potential of sprouting thus changing the species composition of the site.

• Boring and scribing of some specific tree species.

Tree species with thin bark, such as quaking aspen, birch, and young cottonwoods are particularly vulnerable to disease when open wounds are created. Try to bore trees off the fixed radius plots for these

species.

Plot layout and referencing MQO

RP selection:

Tolerance: No error in selection criteria, 95% of the time

RP data items (diam, species, etc.):

Tolerance: See RP Info on page 30

Aerial photograph:

Tolerance: Previous and current pinpricks in correct spot: +/- 1 mm, 100% of the time

Current plot center and RP labeled correctly: no errors, 100% of the time

Plot location:

Tolerance: Remeasured plot: relocated, 100% of the time

New plot: photos 1:12,000 scale or greater: located +/- 10.0 ft, 90% of the time photos smaller than 1:12,000 scale +/- 30.0 ft, 90% of the time

Subplot location:

Tolerance: Remeasured subplot: +/- 0.5 ft. of previous location, 100% of the time

New subplot: +/- 5.0 ft., 90% of the time

Subplot witness (tree) selection:

Tolerance: No error in selection criteria, 95% of the time

Microplot location:

Tolerance: Remeasured microplot: +/- 0.1 ft. of previous location, 100% of the time

New microplot: +/- 0.1 ft., 90% of the time

16

Annual Inventory 2004

IV. PLOT LEVEL DATA

IV. PLOT LEVEL DATA

TABLE OF CONTENTS

(First three variables used to enter Plot Menu)

STATE, PLOT NUMBER, &

QA STATUS………………………………………………………………………………..

18

Plot

GPS Info……………………………………………………………………26

RP Info……………………………………………………………………...30

17

Annual Inventory 2004

IV. PLOT LEVEL DATA

IV. PLOT LEVEL DATA

NOTE:

The first three items in PLOT LEVEL DATA will be entered by the user prior to entering the Plot Menu.

There are three “subchapters” ( Plot Attributes , GPS Info , and RP Info )in the PLOT LEVEL DATA chapter, and each represents a different option in the PLOT LEVEL DATA menu, which is accessed by selecting “ Plot lvl data ” from the Plot Menu.

Plot Level Data records the plot location and information about the field crew visit and landowner contact. This information aids future crews in plot relocation, sets up date and inventory cycle information in the data recorder, and makes it possible to analyze the relationship of plot data to other mapped data.

Item 1--STATE

Record the unique FIPS (Federal Information Processing Standard) code identifying the State where the plot center is located.

When collected: All plots

Field width: 2 digits

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values:

Code State

02 Alaska

Item 2--PLOT NUMBER

Record the identification number for each plot, unique within each survey unit.

If SAMPLE KIND = 3 (replacement plot) then use 99999 as a surrogate number until a new plot number is reassigned back at the field office. See your supervisor before downloading any SAMPLE KIND = 3 plots back at the field office (see Replacement Plot on page 9 for more information)

When collected: All plots SAMPLE KIND = 1 or SAMPLE KIND = 2

Field width: 5 digits

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values: 1 to 99999

Item 3--QA STATUS

Record the code to indicate the type of plot data being collected.

When collected: All plots

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values:

File Name Code Code Visit type

T

D

B

H

P

C

R

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Standard production plot

Cold check

Reference plot (off grid)

Training/practice plot (off grid)

Botched plot file (disregard during data processing)

Blind check

Production plot (hot check)

Electronic data files are automatically named by the data recorder using the PLOT NUMBER and File Name

Code (shown in column above). Electronic data files for plots with QA STATUS 2 to 6 are saved as separate

18

Annual Inventory 2004

IV. PLOT LEVEL DATA files so that the original standard production plot data is preserved and can be used for quality control and statistical analysis.

Cold check - an informal inspection done either as part of the training process, or as part of ongoing QC program. The inspector checks completed work after a crew has turned it in. Data errors are corrected (in a separate, updated plot data file).

Blind check - a formal inspection done without crew data on hand; a full re-installation of the plot for the purpose of obtaining a measure of data quality. The two data sets are maintained separately. Data errors are

NOT corrected. Blind checks are done on production plots only.

Hot check - an informal inspection. Usually done as a part of the training process. The inspector is present on the plot with the crew and provides immediate feedback regarding data quality. Data errors are corrected in the plot file as the crew completes its work.

- PLOT ATTRIBUTES -

Accessible by entering “Plot lvl data” from the Plot Menu.

Item 4-- AK SAMPLE KIND

Record the code that describes the kind of plot being installed.

When collected: All plots

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time.

Values: plot establishment

The initial establishment and sampling of a national design plot (FIA Field Guide versions

1.1 and higher). SAMPLE KIND 1 is assigned under the following circumstances:

• Initial activation of a panel or subpanel

• Reactivation of a panel or subpanel that was previously dropped

• Resampling of established plots that were not sampled at the previous visit

2 Remeasurement Remeasurement of a national design plot that was sampled at the previous inventory -- field-visited or remotely classified.

3 Replacement A replacement plot for a previously established plot. Assign SAMPLE KIND = 3 if a plot is installed at a location other than the previous location (i.e., plots that have been lost, moved, or otherwise replaced). Note: that replacement plots require a separate plot file for the previous plot. Replaced plots are assigned PLOT STATUS = 3 (nonsampled) ,

SAMPLE KIND = 2, and the appropriate NONSAMPLED REASON code. The plot number for the replacement plot is assigned by NIMS. Use 99999 for the replacement plot number while in the field until a proper number can be assigned back in the field office.

See page 9 for more information about replacement plots.

Item 5--AK data source

Record the code that describes the source for the data collected on the plot location.

When collected: All Plots

Field width:1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values:

19

Annual Inventory 2004

IV. PLOT LEVEL DATA

1

2

3

4

Ground

Fly-over

All data collected from a ground visit by the field crew.

Location was flown over; information for the location was determined from the air.

PI Information for location was determined in the office using photo interpretation.

Other-specify Specify source of data in Plot Level Notes and on the location record

Item 6--PLOT STATUS

Record the code that describes the sampling status of the plot.

When collected: All plots

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values:

1 Sampled

2 Sampled

3 Nonsampled at least one accessible forest land condition present on plot or previously had at least one accessible forest land condition on plot no accessible forest land condition present on plot and no previously accessible forest land condition on plot = Non Forest

See Chapter V. CONDITION CLASS starting on page 33, for more information on what qualifies as accessible forest land.

Item 7--AK PLOT NONSAMPLED REASON (Plot Nons Rsn)

For entire plots that cannot be sampled, record one of the following reasons

When collected: When PLOT STATUS = 3

Field width: 2 digits

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values:

Code Description

01 Outside U.S. boundary - Assign this code to condition classes beyond the U.S. border.

Entire plots would only be assigned this code if it is determined that a previously measured plot is currently beyond the U.S. border.

02 Denied access area - Any area within the sampled area of a plot to which access is denied by the legal owner, or to which an owner of the only reasonable route to the plot denies access. There are no minimum area or width requirements for a condition class delineated by denied access. Because a denied access condition can become accessible in the future, it remains in the sample and is re-examined at the next occasion to determine if access is available.

03 Hazardous situation - Any area within the sampled area on plot that cannot be accessed because of a hazard or danger, for example cliffs, quarries, strip mines, illegal substance plantations, temporary high water, etc. Although the hazard is not likely to change over time, a hazardous condition remains in the sample and is re-examined at the next occasion to determine if the hazard is still present. There are no minimum size or width requirements for a condition class delineated by a hazardous condition.

05 Lost data - The plot data file was discovered to be corrupt after panel was completed and submitted for processing. This code is assigned to entire plots or full subplots that could not be processed, and is applied at the time of processing after notification to the region. NOTE:

This code is for office use only.

06 Lost plot - This code applies to whole plots that cannot be relocated. This situation requires notification of the field supervisor. Whenever this code is assigned, a replacement plot is required. The plot that is lost is assigned SAMPLE KIND = 2 and NONSAMPLED REASON

= 6. The replacement plot is assigned SAMPLE KIND = 3.

20

Annual Inventory 2004

IV. PLOT LEVEL DATA

08 Skipped visit - This code applies to whole plots that are skipped (ie., the entire plot should be assigned to this condition class). It is used for plots that are not completed prior to the time a panel is finished and submitted for processing. NOTE: This code is for office use only.

09 Dropped intensified plot - This code applies only to regions engaged in intensification. It is used for intensified plots that have been dropped due to a change in grid intensity.

NOTE:

• This code is for office use only.

• This code is primarily intended for regions engage in sub-paneling for intensification purposes

• Plot records for dropped subpanels may be generated with the information management system.

10 Other - This code is used whenever a plot or condition class is not sampled due to a reason other than one of the specific reasons already listed. A description of the situation is required in the PLOT LEVEL NOTES.

11 Ocean - Plot falls in ocean water below the mean high tide line. Where rivers or canals enter the ocean, ocean water begins where the river/canal width exceeds ¼ nautical mile.

Item 8--CONDITION CLASS STATUS 1 (CC1 Status)

Record the CONDITION CLASS STATUS at the center of subplot 1. Record the code that describes the status of the condition. The instructions in Section B and C (in the CONDITION CLASS chapter) apply when delineating condition classes that differ by CONDITION CLASS STATUS.

When collected: When PLOT STATUS = 2,3

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values:

Code Description

2

3

4

5

Nonforest land

Noncensus water

Census water

Nonsampled

Item 9--AK estimated nonsampled land cover type (NonS Land Cvr)

Record an estimate of what cover type has plurality over the entire plot area. This variable is only available when PLOT NONSAMPLED REASON = 2,3,or 10. For example: if the plot is nonsampled because of hazardous conditions (entered as 03 in PLOT NONSAMPLED REASON above), but the plot area is stocked with mountain hemlock, then enter 270 for the “estimated nonsampled land cover type”. Note: land cover type includes: Nonforest (002), Noncensus water (003), and Census water(004).

When collected: When AK PLOT NONSAMPLED REASON = 2, 3, or 10

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: No errors in group or type

MQO: at least 95% of the time

Values:

Code Land Cover Type

002 Nonforest

Spruce / Fir Group

21

Annual Inventory 2004

IV. PLOT LEVEL DATA

Code Land Cover Type

Fir / Spruce / Mountain Hemlock Group

271 Alaska-yellow-cedar

Lodgepole Pine Group

Hemlock / Sitka Spruce Group

Elm / Ash / Cottonwood Group

703 cottonwood

Aspen / Birch Group

901 aspen

Alder / Maple Group

Item 10--PREVIOUS PLOT NUMBER (Prev Plt Num)

Record the identification number for the plot that is being replaced.

When collected: When SAMPLE KIND = 3

Field width: 5 digits

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values: 00001 to 99999

Item 11--AK start date

Enter the month, day, and year in which the sampling on the location being measured was started.

When collected: All plots

Field width: 2 - month, 2 - day, and 4 - year

Tolerance: no errors

MQO: 100% of the time

Values: Month:

Month Month Code

May 05 September 09

February 02 June 06 October 10

April 04

Day: 1-31

Year: ≥ 2004

22

Annual Inventory 2004

IV. PLOT LEVEL DATA

Item 12-- HORIZONTAL DISTANCE TO IMPROVED ROAD (Road Distance)

Record the straight-line distance from plot center (subplot 1) to the nearest improved road. An improved road is a road of any width that is maintained as evidenced by pavement, gravel, grading, ditching, and/or other improvements

When collected: All plots with at least one accessible forest land condition class (PLOT STATUS =1)

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values:

Code Horizontal Distance

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

100 ft. or less

101 to 300 ft.

301 to 500 ft.

501 to 1000 ft.

1001 ft. to 1/2 mile

1/2 to 1 mile

1 to 3 miles

3 to 5 miles

Greater than 5 miles

Item 13--WATER ON PLOT (Water Plot)

Record the water source that has the greatest impact on the area within the accessible forest land portion of any of the four subplots. The coding hierarchy is listed in order from large permanent water to temporary water.

This variable can be used for recreation, wildlife, hydrology, and timber availability studies.

When collected: All plots with at least one accessible forest land condition class (PLOT STATUS = 1)

Field width: 1 digits

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 90% of the time.

Values:

Code Water on plot

0

1

2

3

4

None – no water sources within the accessible forest land condition class

Permanent streams or ponds too small to qualify for noncensus water

Permanent water in the form of deep swamps, bogs, marshes without standing trees present and less than 1.0 ac in size or with standing trees

Ditch/canal – human made channels used as a means of moving water, such as irrigation or drainage

Temporary streams

Item 14--CREW TYPE

Record the code to specify what type of crew is measuring the plot.

When collected: All plots

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values:

Code Crew type

1

2

Standard field crew

QA crew (any QA crew member present collecting data, regardless of plot QA Status )

23

Annual Inventory 2004

IV. PLOT LEVEL DATA

Item 15--AK crew leader (CLead)

Enter first initial and last name of the crew leader assigned to this plot. (the crew leader is responsible for correct plot installation and overall quality of the data)

When collected: All plots

Field width: 12

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values: 1 name of up to 12 characters

Item 16--AK crew member 1 - AK crew member 5 (Name1-Name5)

Enter the first initial and last name of up to five additional crew members taking measurements on the plot with the crew leader.

When collected: All plots

Field width: 12

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values: up to 12 characters for each additional crew member

Item 17--AK landowner plot summary request (Own Request)

1-digit code which indicates if a landowner of the plot area requests a summary of the data collected on their land. Make any special comments relevant to the data request (ie. landowner does not own all 4 subplots, the owner of subplot 2 wants data, etc.) on the location record.

When collected: All plots

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values:

0

1

2

No data request

Plot summary requested

Special case request-specify

Item 18--AK end date

Enter the month, day, and year in which the sampling on the location being measured was completed.

NOTE: In most cases the sampling for a location will be completed in one day, in which case the start and end dates will be the same.

When collected: All plots

Field width: 2 - month, 2 - day, and 4 - year

Tolerance: no errors

MQO: 100% of the time

Values: Month:

Month Month Code

May 05 September 09

February 02 June 06 October 10

April 04

Day: 1-31

Year: ≥ 2004

24

Annual Inventory 2004

IV. PLOT LEVEL DATA

Item 19--AK P2/P3 plot type (P2/P3 Plot)

This variable will be needed when creating a Replacement plot file for a lost or missing plot (see Replacement

Plots page 9). Check the old (lost/missing) plot folder to see if it has “P3” printed on it. If it does, then use code

1 for this variable. If it does not then use 0 for this variable. For all other plot situations this variable will be downloaded. (If the plot cannot be extracted, then manual data entry may also require the appropriate code for this variable).

When collected: All plots, downloaded , may enter manually under dire circumstances

Field width: 1

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: 100% of the time

Values:

Code Description

0 P2 Plot Only

1 P2/P3 Co-located (co-install)

Item 20--PLOT - LEVEL NOTES

Use these fields to record notes pertaining to the entire plot.

Accessible by pushing the F4 key while in the Plot Attributes screen.

When collected: All plots

Field width: 160

Tolerance: N/A

MQO: N/A

Values: English language words, phrases, and numbers

Downloaded ( ↓ Not to be updated ↓ ) portion of the screen

These Items will be downloaded for your use in locating old plots, or will give information that does not require editing by the field crews.

Item 21--AK old location ID (Old Loc ID)

This item is included as an aid in finding/identifying old reference/witness tags to correctly locate PC. This item will also be printed on the plot folder labels (when applicable).

When collected: downloaded only when plot has been previously assigned an old location ID.

Field width: 7 (3 alpha + 4 numeric)

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values: varies, numbering system based on three letters abbreviating map quad names with a unique 4 digit number. Example: COR0260 = Cordova quad plot 260

Item 22--Date of previous inventory (Prev Date)

If the previous visit end date is known, then it will be downloaded and available for reference here.

When collected: downloaded only when plot has been previously visited.

Field width: 2 - month, 2 - day, and 4 - year

Tolerance: no errors

MQO: 100% of the time

Values: Month:

Month Month Code

May 05 September 09

February 02 June 06 October 10

April 04

25

Annual Inventory 2004

IV. PLOT LEVEL DATA

Day: 1-31

Year: variable, > 1994

Item 23--FIELD GUIDE VERSION (Core Man Ver)

Record the version number of the Forest Inventory and Analysis National Core Field Guide which was used to collect the data on this plot. This will be used to match collected data to the proper version of the field manual

When collected: All plots, downloaded

Field width: 2 digits (x.y)

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: 100% of the time.

Values: 2.0

Item 24--AK data recorder program version # (PDR Version)

A 3-digit field identifying the version number of the data recorder program used to collect data on the plot. In the format x.y.z. PNW AK data recorder program version # will start at 5.0.0 at the beginning of the field season. If minor modifications to the data recorder program are made in response to changes in field procedures or programming requirements, the z field will be changed to z+1. If more significant changes are made, the y field will be changed to y+1. The first field (x) will be changed only in the event of a major modification to the program. Field manuals are not reprinted during the season, but future printings would include any change(s) made to procedures. Do not change the data recorder generated code.

When collected: downloaded , all plots

Field width: three digits (x.y.z.)

Tolerance: no errors

MQO: 100% of the time

Values: x.y.z (starting at 5.0.0)

- GPS INFO -

Accessible by entering “Plot lvl data” from the Plot Menu.

There will be multiple records per plot in the GPS screen. Typically a set of coordinates for 3 types (requiring separate records or lines of data), including LZ, RP, and PC will be entered into the data recorder.

GPS COORDINATES

Use a global positioning system (GPS) unit to determine the plot coordinates and elevation of all field visited plot locations .

GPS UNIT SETTINGS, DATUM, and COORDINATE SYSTEM

Consult the GPS unit operating manual or other regional instructions to ensure that the GPS unit internal settings, including Datum and Coordinate system, are correctly configured.

Each FIA unit will determine the Datum to be used in that region. Coordinates collected using any appropriate datum can be converted back to a national standard for reporting purposes.

See Chapter XI. COORDINATES (GPS) starting on page 141 for instructions on setting up and using the field

GPS unit.

COLLECTING READINGS

Collect at least 180 GPS readings at the plot center which will then be averaged by the GPS unit. Each individual reading should have an error of less than 70 feet if possible (the error of all the averaged readings is far less).

26

Annual Inventory 2004

IV. PLOT LEVEL DATA

Soon after arriving at plot center, use the GPS unit to attempt to collect coordinates. If suitable readings (180 readings at error less than or equal to 70 feet) cannot be obtained, try again before leaving the plot center.

If it is still not possible to get suitable coordinates from plot center, attempt to obtain them from a location within

200 ft of plot center. Obtain the azimuth and horizontal distance from the "offset" location to plot center. If a

PLGR unit is used use the Rng-Calc function in the PLGR to compute the coordinates of the plot center (see

PLGR guide, separate document) . If another type of GPS unit is used, record the azimuth and horizontal distance in Items 35,36.

Coordinates may be collected further than 200 feet away from the plot center if a laser measuring device is used to determine the horizontal distance from the "offset" location to plot center. Again, if a PLGR unit is used, Use the Rng-Calc function in the PLGR to compute the coordinates of the plot center. If another type of

GPS unit is used, record the azimuth and horizontal distance in Items 35,36 .

In all cases try to obtain at least 180 readings before recording the coordinates.

Item 25--AK GPS location type (L)

Record the location type for the coordinates collected on the ground.

When collected: All GPS records

Field width: 1

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values:

Code Type Description

1 LZ/TR Landing zone / Truck parking spot (required)

2 RP Reference point (required)

3 (PC)

4 Subplot 2 Use only if PC not possible

5 Subplot 3 Use only if PC not possible

6 Subplot 4 Use only if PC not possible

7 Other Describe in Plot Level Notes/Location Record

Item 26—AK GPS UNIT TYPE (T)

Record the kind of GPS unit used to collect coordinates. If suitable coordinates cannot be obtained, record 0.

When collected: All field visited plots

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values:

0

1

2

3

4

GPS coordinates not collected (requires GPS note)

Rockwell Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver (PLGR)

Other brand capable of field averaging (Magellan SportTrack Pro)

Other brands capable of producing files that can be post processed

Other brands not capable of field averaging or post processing

Item 27--AK GPS SERIAL NUMBER (ID/Ser#)

Record the last six digits of the serial number on the GPS unit used.

The six digit serial number is affixed to the front of the GPS, just above the directional keypad.

When collected: When GPS UNIT TYPE > 0

Field width: 6 digits

Tolerance: No errors

27

Annual Inventory 2004

IV. PLOT LEVEL DATA

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values: 000001 to 999999

Item 28--AK COORDINATE SYSTEM (C)

Record a code indicating the type of coordinate system used to obtain readings.

When collected: When GPS UNIT TYPE > 0

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values:

Item 29--AK GPS latitude degrees (Lt)

Record the latitude degrees, as obtained from the waypoint saved in the GPS unit

When collected: When COORDINATE SYSTEM = 1

Field width: 2 digits

Tolerance: +/- 140 feet

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values: 51-70

Item 30--AK GPS latitude minutes

Record the latitude decimal minutes, as obtained from the waypoint saved in the GPS unit

When collected: When COORDINATE SYSTEM = 1

Field width: 5 digits

Tolerance: +/- 140 feet

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values: 00.000 – 59.999

Item 31--AK GPS longitude degrees (Long)

Record the Longitude degrees, as obtained from the waypoint saved in the GPS unit

When collected: When COORDINATE SYSTEM = 1

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: +/- 140 feet

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values: 129 – 165

Item 32--AK GPS longitude minutes

Record the Longitude decimal minutes, as obtained from the waypoint saved in the GPS unit

When collected: When COORDINATE SYSTEM = 1

Field width: 5 digits

Tolerance: +/- 140 feet

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values: 00.000 – 59.999

Item 33--AK NUMBER OF READINGS (Num)

Record a 3-digit code indicating how many readings were averaged by the GPS unit to calculate the plot coordinates. Collect at least 180 readings if possible.

The data recorder program requires that the number of averaged readings be entered. The Magellan GPS units do not have a number of readings counter, instead it utilizes a timer. The timer is displayed on the position screen. It displays in hours:minutes:seconds. The GPS receiver collects one reading per second while averaging. To correctly enter the number of readings in the data recorder, the time in minutes and seconds

28

Annual Inventory 2004

IV. PLOT LEVEL DATA must be converted to number of readings. Since the GPS unit collects 60 readings per minute of averaging crews must remember to multiply the number of minutes by 60 and then add the number of seconds shown to that result. For example, if the Magellan receiver averages for three minutes and twelve seconds it will display

00:03:12. To convert this to number of readings multiply three minutes by sixty and add twelve. 3 x 60 = 180 +

12 = 192. Crews would enter 192 into the NUMBER OF READINGS field (in the data recorder program).

When collected: When GPS UNIT TYPE = 1 or 2

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values: 001 to 999

Item 34--AK GPS ERROR (Err)

Record the error as shown on the GPS unit to the nearest foot. As described in Collecting Readings on page

26, make every effort to collect readings only when the error less than or equal to 70 feet . However, if after trying several different times during the day, at several different locations, this is not possible, record readings with an error of up to 999 feet.

When collected: When GPS UNIT TYPE = 1 or 2

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values: 000 to 070 if possible

071 to 999 if an error of less than 70 cannot be obtained

Item 35--AK GPS ELEVATION (Elevat)

Record the elevation above mean sea level of the plot center, in feet, as determined by GPS.

When collected: When GPS UNIT TYPE = 1, 2 or 4

Field width: 6 digits

Tolerance: +/- 280 ft

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values: -00100 to 20000

CORRECTION FOR "OFFSET" LOCATION

As described in Collecting Readings (pg 26) , coordinates may be collected at a location other than the plot center (an “offset” location). If a PLGR unit is used all offset coordinates will be "corrected" back using the

Rng/Calc function. If a GPS unit other than a PLGR is used, then record Items 36 and 37.

Item 36--AK AZIMUTH TO PLOT CENTER (Azm)

Record, in degrees, the azimuth from the location where coordinates were collected to actual plot center. If coordinates are collected at plot center, record 000.

When collected: When GPS UNIT = 2, 3 or 4

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance +/- 3 degrees

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values: 000 when coordinates collected at plot center

001 to 360 when coordinates are not collected at plot center

Item 37--AK DISTANCE TO PLOT CENTER (Dist)

Record the horizontal distance in feet from the location where coordinates were collected to the actual plot center. If coordinates are collected at plot center, record 000. As described in Collecting Readings (page 26), if a Laser range finder is used to determine DISTANCE TO PLOT CENTER, offset locations may be up to 999 feet from the plot center. If a range finder is not used, the offset location must be within 200 feet.

29

Annual Inventory 2004

IV. PLOT LEVEL DATA

When collected: When GPS UNIT = 2, 3 or 4

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: +/- 6 ft

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values: 000 coordinates collected at plot center

001 to 200 when a Laser range finder is not used to determine distance

001 to 999 when a Laser range finder is used to determine distance

Item 38--AK GPS notes

Record any notes needed to clarify or explain a special situation in the particular GPS record being defined.

Accessible by pushing the F4 key, can enter a note for each individual GPS record (line).

When collected: As needed

Field width: 40

Tolerance: N/A

MQO: N/A

Values: Words or abbreviated sentances

- RP INFO -

Accessible by entering “Plot lvl data” from the Plot Menu.

Reference point (RP) data items

Record the following items which describe the RP and the course from the RP to the plot as described In the RP section (page 12). These data items should match what is recorded on the paper location record, and are etched into the tags affixed to the RP.

Item 39--AK RP type (T) Record the type of object chosen as the Reference Point (RP).

When collected: All plots with PLOT STATUS = 1

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values:

Code RP type

1 Tree

2 Rock

3 Shrub

4 Other-specify in RP notes

Item 40--AK RP species (Spc)

If the RP is a tree or stump record it's species code.

When collected: When AK RP type = 1

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values:

30

Annual Inventory 2004

IV. PLOT LEVEL DATA

CODE SPECIES CODE SPECIES

011 Pacific redcedar

019 subalpine hemlock

094 white alder

095 black birch

098 sitka aspen

Item 41--AK RP diameter (Diam)

If the RP is a tree or stump, measure (or estimate) and record it's diameter to the nearest inch.

When collected: When AK RP type = 1

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: +/- 10%

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Value: 001-999

Item 42--AK RP azimuth (Azm)

Record, in degrees, the azimuth from the RP to the plot.

When collected: All plots with PLOT STATUS = 1

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: +/- 4 degrees

MQO: At least 95% of the time

Value: 001-360

Item 43--AK RP horizontal distance (Dist)

Record, to the nearest foot, the horizontal distance from the face of the RP (basal tag, facing plot center).

When collected: All plots with PLOT STATUS = 1

Field width: 4 digits

Tolerance: +/- 5%

MQO: At least 95% of the time

Value: 0001-9999

Item 44--AK RP az/dist to subplot # (S)

Record the 1-digit number of the subplot which is referenced from the RP. Reference to subplot 1 whenever possible.

When collected: All plots with PLOT STATUS = 1

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values: 1 to 4

31

Annual Inventory 2004

IV. PLOT LEVEL DATA

Item 45--AK RP notes

Record notes to explain any special RP situation that may need clarification for future plot visits. (ie. shrub species, height/size of rock, etc.) Accessible by pushing the F4 key, can enter a note for each individual RP record (line).

When collected: When needed to describe a special situation with the plot RP

Field width: 40

Tolerance: N/A

MQO: N/A

Value: Single words or abbreviated sentances

32

Annual Inventory 2004

V. CONDITION CLASS

V. CONDITION CLASS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

A. DETERMINATION OF CONDITION CLASS……………………………………..34

B. CONDITION CLASS STATUS DEFINITIONS……………………………………34

1. Accessible forest land

2. Nonforest land

3. Noncensus water

4. Census water

C. CONDITION CLASS ATTRIBUTES……………………………………………….37

D. DELINEATING CONDITION CLASSES

DIFFERING IN CONDITION STATUS……………………………………………38

Five exceptions size and width requirements

E. DELINEATING CONDITION CLASSES

WITHIN ACCESSIBLE FOREST LAND…………………………………………..42

1. Distinct boundary within a subplot or microplot

2. Indistinct boundary within a subplot

3. A boundary or transition zone between fixed radii

plots that sample distinctly different condition classes

4. Riparian forest area

F. ANCILLARY (NON-DELINEATING) VARIABLES………………………………..48

OWNER CLASS

PRIVATE OWNER INDUSTRIAL STATUS

ARTIFICIAL REGENERATION SPECIES

DISTURBANCE (up to 3 coded)

DISTURBANCE YEAR (1 per disturbance)

TREATMENT (up to 3 coded)

TREATMENT YEAR (1 per treatment)

PHYSIOGRAPHIC CLASS

NONFOREST MAPPING RULES

PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE………………………………………………………… 53

33

Annual Inventory 2004

V. CONDITION CLASS

V. CONDITION CLASS

The Forest Inventory and Analyisis (FIA) plot is a cluster of four subplots in a fixed pattern. Subplots are never reconfigured or moved in order to confine them to a single condition class; a plot may straddle more than one condition class. Every plot samples at least one condition class: the condition class present at plot center (the center of subplot 1)

A. DETERMINATION OF CONDITION CLASS

Step 1: Delineate the plot area by CONDITION CLASS STATUS

The first attribute considered when defining a condition class is CONDITION CLASS STATUS. The area sampled by a plot is assigned to condition classes based upon the following differences in CONDITION CLASS

STATUS:

1. Accessible forest land

4. Census land

3. Noncensus water

5. Nonsampled

Accessible forest land defines the population of interest for FIA purposes. This is the area where most of the data collection is conducted.

NOTE: One additional attribute, PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE, is used to define all nonforest condition classes in the sampled area on a plot. See Nonforest Land on page 36 and Item 26--AK PRESENT

NONFOREST LAND USE on page 53 for more information on mapping requirements of Nonforest lands.

Step 2: Further subdivide Accessible Forest Land by 6 delineation variables

Any condition class sampled as accessible forest land may be further subdivided, in order of listed priority, into smaller condition classes if distinct, contrasting condition classes are present because of variation in any of the following attributes within the sampled area:

1. RESERVED

2. OWNER

TYPE

4. STAND SIZE CLASS

5. REGENERATION

DENSITY

No other attribute shall be the basis for recognizing contrasting accessible forest land condition classes. For each condition class recognized, several “ancillary attributes” that help describe the condition will be collected, but these “ancillary attributes” will not be used for delineation purposes.

B. CONDITION CLASS STATUS DEFINITIONS

1.

Accessible forest land

Land that is within the population of interest, is accessible, is on a subplot that can be occupied at subplot center, can safely be visited, and meets the following criteria:

⇒ the condition is at least 10-percent stocked by trees of any size or has been at least 10 percent stocked in the past. Additionally, the condition is not subject to nonforest use(s) that prevent normal tree regeneration and succession such as regular mowing, intensive grazing, or recreation activities;

34

Annual Inventory 2004

V. CONDITION CLASS

To determine stocking levels see “Determination of Stocking Values for Land Use Classification” on page 161

To qualify as forest land, the prospective condition must be at least 1.0 acre in size and 120.0 feet wide measured stem-to-stem from the outer-most edge. Forested strips must be 120.0 feet wide for a continuous length of at least 363.0 feet in order to meet the acre threshold. Forested strips that do not meet these requirements are classified as part of the adjacent nonforest land.

Transition zones and forest/nonforest encroachment - When an accessible forest land condition encroaches into a nonforest condition, the border between forest and nonforest is often a gradual change in tree cover or stocking with no clear and abrupt boundary. In addition, it may be difficult to determine exactly where the forested area meets the minimum stocking criteria and where it does not. For these cases, determine where the land clearly meets the 10 percent minimum forest land stocking, and where it clearly is less than required stocking; divide the zone between these points in half, and determine the side of the zone on which the subplot center is located. Classify the condition class of the subplot based on this line.

Example of classifying the condition class of the subplot in a transition zone with forest/nonforest encroachment.

For example, at measurement time 1, a clear and distinct boundary existed between the forest and nonforest condition classes. At time 2, however, there now exists a zone of regeneration or small diameter trees between the previous forest condition and where the nonforest clearly remains. If the zone of encroachment is clearly stocked where it meets the nonforest, classify the entire zone as forest. If the zone is clearly nonforest up to the original stand, call it all nonforest. If the encroachment or transition zone is not clearly stocked where it meets the nonforest, determine where it is clearly stocked (forest) and where it is clearly not stocked (nonforest); divide this zone in half, and classify the entire subplot based on which side of the line the subplot center falls.

Treated strips – Occasionally, crews will come across plantations of trees, in which rows of trees alternate with strips of vegetation that have been bulldozed, mowed, tilled, treated with herbicide, or crushed.

Because these strip treatments are conducted to optimize growth or to release the stand, the areas are considered forest land, and the treatment is considered a timber stand improvement operation. Do not confuse these practices with similar treatments on nonforest lands such as yards or rights-of-way. Contact with the landowner may help determine the intent of a treatment.

35

Annual Inventory 2004

V. CONDITION CLASS

Indistinct boundary due to the condition minimum-width definition: Do not subdivide subplots where a condition class may change due only to the forest vs. nonforest minimum width (120.0 feet) definition.

Although the point where the definition changes from forest to nonforest creates an invisible “line” between conditions, this definitional boundary is not distinct and obvious . See the figures below . Where the point of the definition change occurs on the subplot, determine only if the subplot center is on the forest or nonforest side of that approximate boundary, and classify the entire subplot based on the condition of the subplot center. If the boundary crosses through the center of the subplot, classify the subplot as the condition it most resembles. If the boundary occurs between subplots, classify each subplot based on its relation to the definitional boundary.

Forest condition narrows within a nonforest condition. Examine the location of the subplot center in reference to the approximate line

Nonforest condition narrows within a forest condition. Examine the location of the subplot center in reference to the approximate line where the forest narrows to 120.0 feet wide.

In this example the entire subplot is classified where the non forest narrows to 120.0 feet wide.

In this example the entire subplot is classified as forest. as

2. Nonforest land

Nonforest land is any land within the sample that does not meet the definition of accessible forest land or any of the other CONDITION CLASS STATUS values defined in #’s 3, 4 (Noncensus - Census water) below . To qualify, the area must be at least 1.0 acre in size and 120.0 feet wide, with 5 exceptions discussed in section

D below. Do not consider evidence of "possible" or future development or conversion. A nonforest land condition will remain in the sample and will be examined at the next occasion to see if it has become forest land.

On all field visited plots with an accessible forest land condition class, map all of the nonforest condition classes present on the 24.0-foot fixed-radius at each established subplot. Do not combine nonforest condition classes present. Example: if nonforest--urban land and nonforest--cropland are both present within a 24.0-foot fixedradius plot, map each nonforest land use as a separate condition class. On subplots with no accessible forest land condition classes within the 24.0-foot radius, record only the nonforest land use at the subplot center. All

Nonforest land condition classes are assigned a present nonforest land use code, see Item 26--AK PRESENT

NONFOREST LAND USE on page 53.

Plots that are entirely nonforest fall into one of the following three categories:

1. The plot is field visited on the ground (AK Data source = 1 or 4).

AK PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE is collected at each subplot center.

PC GPS coordinates are collected.

A plot file is created in the field data recorder.

2. The plot is field visited and viewed from a distance (AK Data source = 1, 2, or 4)

AK PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE is collected for each subplot center.

A plot file is created in the field data recorder.

3. The plot is not field visited. (AK Data source = 3 or 4)

AK PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE is collected for each subplot center.

A plot data file is created in the office.

36

Annual Inventory 2004

V. CONDITION CLASS

3. Noncensus water

Lakes, reservoirs, ponds, and similar bodies of water 1.0 acre to 4.5 acres in size. Rivers, streams, canals, etc., 30.0 ft to 200 ft wide.

If a subplot center (including subplot 1) lands in Noncensus water, the entire subplot is considered

Noncensus water and is classified as a condition class with CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 3 (Noncensus water). No field measurements are made on that subplot. Establish and measure other subplots following normal procedures.

If the center of a subplot is accessible, but the subplot has Noncensus water present within it's 24.0-foot fixed-radius plot; Map the Noncensus water area as a separate condition class. Use normal procedures to map and measure condition classes.

4. Census water

Lakes, reservoirs, ponds, and similar bodies of water 4.5 ac in size and larger; and rivers, streams, canals, etc., more than 200 ft wide (1990 U.S. Census definition).

If a subplot center (including subplot 1) lands in Census water, the entire subplot is considered Census water and is classified as a condition class with CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 4 (Census water). No field measurements are made on that subplot. Establish and measure other subplots following normal procedures.

If the center of a subplot is accessible, but the subplot has Census water present within it's 24.0-foot fixedradius plot; Map the Census water area as a separate condition class. Use normal procedures to map and measure condition classes.

C. CONDITION CLASS ATTRIBUTES

A CONDITION CLASS NUMBER and a classification for CONDITION CLASS STATUS are required for every condition class sampled on a plot. For each condition class classified as accessible forest land, a classification is required for each of the following attributes:

RESERVED STATUS

OWNER GROUP

FOREST

CLASS where

a a

REGENERATION STATUS

TREE DENSITY

OWNER CLASS

PRIVATE OWNER INDUSTRIAL STATUS

ARTIFICIAL REGENERATION SPECIES

DISTURBANCE (up to 3 coded)

DISTURBANCE YEAR (1 per disturbance)

Ancillary - changes do not delineate

TREATMENT (up to 3 coded)

TREATMENT YEAR (1 per treatment)

PHYSIOGRAPHIC

PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE

(use for all nonforest conditions, regardless of past condition). a new condition class

When classifying CONDITION CLASS STATUS, OWNER GROUP, RESERVED STATUS, and PRESENT

NONFOREST LAND USE, base the classification on what is present within the area defined by the fixed radius plot (subplot or microplot).

All other variables including: FOREST TYPE, STAND SIZE CLASS, REGENERATION STATUS, TREE

DENSITY, DISTURBANCE, TREATMENT, and PHYSIOGRAPHIC CLASS; should be determined over the entire condition, including but not exclusive to what is encountered within the subplot/microplot fixed radius.

37

Annual Inventory 2004

V. CONDITION CLASS

D. DELINEATING CONDITION CLASSES DIFFERING IN CONDITION STATUS

The first step in delineated condition classes is to recognize differences in CONDITION CLASS STATUS. The most common difference is adjacent accessible forest land and nonforest land. Adjacent accessible forest land and nonforest land condition classes are recognized only if each of the two prospective condition classes is at least 1.0 acre in size, and each is at least 120.0 feet in width. These size and width minimums apply to both accessible forest land and nonforest land.

Within an accessible forest land condition class, unimproved roads, rock outcrops, and natural nonforest openings less than 1.0 acre in size and less than 120.0 feet in width are considered forest land and are not delineated and classified as separate nonforest condition class.

Within a nonforest land condition class, forested areas or linear strips of trees less than 1.0 acre in size and less than 120.0 feet in width are considered part of the nonforest condition class.

Five exceptions to these size and width requirements apply:

1. Developed nonforest condition: human-caused nonforest land condition classes such as homes or cabins that are less than 1.0 acre in size and 120.0 feet in width and are surrounded by forest land There are three kinds of developed nonforest inclusions that do not have to meet area or width requirements. a) Improved roads: paved roads, gravel roads, or improved dirt roads regularly maintained for longterm continuing use . Unimproved traces and roads created for skidding logs are not considered improved roads. b) Maintained rights-of-way: corridors created for railroads, power lines, gas lines, and canals that are periodically treated to limit the establishment and growth of trees and shrubs.

Areas under powerlines are considered maintained right of way even if no evidence of vegetation treatment is currently evident. c) Developments: structures and the maintained area next to a structure, all less than 1.0 acre in size and surrounded by forest land. Examples of developments are houses or trailers on very small lots, communication installations in a small cleared area within forest land, and barns and sheds.

2. Distinct, alternating strips of forest and nonforest land: this situation occurs when a plot or subplot samples a condition class that is less than 1.0 acre in size and less than 120.0 feet in width. The condition class is one of a series of parallel strips of forest and nonforest land in which none of the strips meet the minimum width requirement. This exception applies only to nonforest conditions that are not listed under

#1, e.g., improved roads, maintained rights-of-way, and developments.

For many small intermingled strips, determine the total area that the alternating strips occupy, and classify according to the CONDITION CLASS STATUS (forest land or nonforest land) that occupies the greater area. If the area of alternating strips is so large or indistinct as to make a total area determination impractical, then classify the sample as forest land.

For two alternating strips of forest and nonforest between two qualifying areas of nonforest land and forest land, see the figure next page . The figure delineates the boundary between the forest and nonforest condition classes for four different examples. The plot center defines the plot condition for all strips covered by the arrow. Any subplot that falls in the alternating strips uses the rule. Any subplot that falls in assigned nonforest / forest is assigned that type.

38

Annual Inventory 2004

V. CONDITION CLASS

Nonforest land

NF

NF

wide greater than 120 ft

PC

Strip of Forest less than 120 ft wide

PC

Strip of

PC

Nonforest less than 120 ft wide

(and not cultural, not a separate condition)

Forest land greater than 120 ft wide

PC

F

F

Example of alternating strips of forested and non forested conditions

3. The 120.0 foot minimum width for delineation does not apply when a corner angle is 90 degrees or greater.

Illustration of the 90 degree corner rule. The dotted lines do not create nonforest conditions.

4. Linear water features: natural water features that are linear in shape such as streams and rivers. A linear water feature must meet the definition for Census or noncensus water to be nonforest area. Therefore, a linear water feature must be at least 30.0 feet wide and cover at least 1.0 acre. The width of a linear water feature is measured across its channel between points on either side up to which water prevents the establishment and survival of trees. To determine whether a linear water feature qualifies as nonforest, rely on all available information on hand such as aerial photos, topographic maps, past survey land calls, and ocular estimates at the current survey visit. Linear water features, that do not meet the definition for

Census or noncensus water should be classified as forest land only if bounded by forest land on both shores. Crews are NOT expected to measure the length of a linear water feature to determine if it meets the 1.0 acre requirement; use professional judgment and common sense on any linear water feature. A 30 ft wide stream needs to be 1452 ft long to be an acre in size.

39

Annual Inventory 2004

V. CONDITION CLASS

5.

Nonsampled conditions within accessible forest land are delineated, regardless of size, as a separate condition.

Item 1--CONDITION CLASS NUMBER

On a plot, assign and record a number for each condition class. The condition class at plot center (the center of subplot 1) is designated condition class 1. Other condition classes are assigned numbers sequentially at the time each condition class is delineated.

In the condition class screen the CONDITION CLASS NUMBER will be shown in a row across the top. Assign the appropriate values in the column below the appropriate CONDITION CLASS NUMBER. The values entered below the CONDITION CLASS NUMBER will be used to define the unique characteristics of each condition class encountered on the plot.

When collected: All condition classes

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of time

Values: 1 to 9

Item 2--CONDITION CLASS STATUS (Cond Status)

Record the code that describes the status of the condition. The instructions in Section B and C (above) apply when delineating condition classes that differ by CONDITION CLASS STATUS.

When collected: All condition classes

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values:

CODE CONDITION CLASS

STATUS

1

2

3

4

5

Accessible forest land

Nonforest land

Noncensus water

Census water

Nonsampled

Item 3--AK CONDITION NONSAMPLED REASON (CC NonS Rsn)

For portions of plots that cannot be sampled (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 5), record one of the following reasons.

When collected: When CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 5

Field width: 2 digits

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values:

01

02

Outside U.S. boundary – Assign this code to condition classes beyond the

U.S. border.

Denied access area – Any area within the sampled area of a plot to which access is denied by the legal owner, or to which an owner of the only reasonable route to the plot denies access. There are no minimum area or width requirements for a condition class delineated by denied access.

Because a denied-access condition can become accessible in the future, it remains in the sample and is re-examined at the next occasion to determine if access is available. In some regions denied access plots may be replaced; check with the field supervisor regarding regional protocols for plot replacement.

40

Annual Inventory 2004

V. CONDITION CLASS

03

10

11

Hazardous situation – Any area within the sampled area on plot that cannot be accessed because of a hazard or danger, for example cliffs, quarries, strip mines, illegal substance plantations, temporary high water, etc.

Although the hazard is not likely to change over time, a hazardous condition remains in the sample and is re-examined at the next occasion to determine if the hazard is still present. There are no minimum size or width requirements for a condition class delineated by a hazardous condition.

Other – This code is used whenever a plot or condition class is not sampled due to a reason other than one of the specific reasons listed. A field note is required to describe the situation.

Ocean - Plot falls in ocean water below the mean high tide line. Where rivers or canals enter the ocean, ocean water begins where the river/canal width exceeds ¼ nautical mile.

Denied access area

If a subplot center (including subplot 1) lands in a access denied area, the entire subplot is considered access denied and is classified as a condition class with CONDITION NONSAMPLED REASON = 2 (denied access area). No field measurements are made on that subplot. Establish and measure other subplots following normal procedures.

If the center of a subplot is accessible, but the subplot has access denied area present within it's 24.0-foot fixed-radius plot; map the access denied area as a separate condition class, use normal procedures to map and measure condition class changes.

Hazardous situation

A plot or subplot is hazardous according to the crew's judgment. If a subplot center (including subplot 1) lands in a hazardous area, the entire subplot is considered hazardous and is classified as a condition class with

CONDITION NONSAMPLED REASON = 3 (hazardous situation). No field measurements are made on that subplot. Establish and measure other subplots following normal procedures.

If the center of a subplot is accessible, but the subplot has hazardous area present within it's 24.0-foot fixedradius plot; map the hazardous area as a separate condition class, do not estimate, or 'rough in' tree, vegetation, or other data on the hazardous portion, and follow normal field instructions to the extent safely possible to map and measure other condition classes.

Ocean

If a subplot center (including subplot 1) lands in the ocean (as defined above), the entire subplot is considered ocean area and is classified as a condition class with CONDITION NONSAMPLED REASON = 11 (Ocean). No field measurements are made on that subplot. Establish and measure other subplots following normal procedures.

If the center of a subplot is accessible, but the subplot has ocean area present within it's 24.0-foot fixed-radius plot; map the ocean area as a separate condition class, use normal procedures to map and measure condition class changes.

Item 4--AK estimated nonsample land cover type (CC NonS Lnd Cvr)

Record the land cover type that best represents the condition class, as determined from the air, ground, or some format of remote sensing. Use your best judgement in estimating which cover type is present. This estimation should be based on the plurality (majority) of the cover type present for the entire condition area.

Note: land cover type includes: Nonforest (002), Noncensus water(003), and Census water(004).

When collected: When AK CONDITION NONSAMPLED REASON = 2, 3, or 10

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 95% of the time

Values:

41

Annual Inventory 2004

V. CONDITION CLASS

Spruce / Fir Group

Fir / Spruce / Mountain Hemlock Group

271 Alaska-yellow-cedar

Lodgepole Pine Group

Hemlock / Sitka Spruce Group

Elm / Ash / Cottonwood Group

703 cottonwood

Aspen / Birch Group

901 aspen

Alder / Maple Group

E. DELINEATING CONDITION CLASSES WITHIN ACCESSIBLE FOREST LAND

Accessible forest land is subdidived into condition classes that are based on differences in RESERVED

STATUS, OWNER GROUP, FOREST TYPE, STAND SIZE CLASS, REGENERATION STATUS, and

TREE DENSITY. Section A applies when delineating contrasting forest condition classes. Specific criteria apply for each of the six attributes and are documented by attribute in Items 5 to 10 (starting on page 45) .

“ Stands ” are defined by plurality of stocking for all live trees that are not overtopped.

Additionally, each separate forest condition class recognized within accessible forest land must be at least

1.0 acre in size and at least 120.0 feet in width. If prospective contrasting forest land condition classes do not each meet these minimum size and width requirements, the most similar prospective conditions should be combined until these minimums are attained.

No other attribute shall be the basis for recognizing contrasting condition classes within accessible forest land. For each condition class recognized, many “ancillary attributes” that help describe the condition will be collected, but will not be used for delineation purposes (see Items 11-25 starting on page 48) .

General instructions for delineating condition classes within accessible forest lands:

1. Distinct boundary within a subplot or microplot: Separate condition classes ARE recognized if, within a subplot, two (or more) distinctly different condition classes are present and delineated by a distinct, abrupt boundary. The boundary is referenced, see Subplot Mapping on page 59.

42

Annual Inventory 2004

V. CONDITION CLASS

2. Indistinct boundary within a subplot: Separate condition classes are NOT recognized if the prospective condition classes abut along an indistinct transition zone, rather than on an abrupt, obvious boundary. Only one condition is recognized, and the subplot is classified entirely as the condition it most resembles.

Example: The four subplots all sample only accessible forest land. Subplots 1, 3, and 4 sample what is clearly a stand of large diameter trees. Subplot 2 falls in the middle of a stand size transition zone. In the zone, the large diameter stand phases into a sapling stand.

Subplot 2 must not be divided into two condition classes on the basis of stand size. Instead, it is treated entirely as part of the large diameter condition class or is assigned entirely to a new condition class that is classified as a seedling/sapling stand. The latter occurs only if the crew thinks the entire subplot is more like a stand of seedlings/saplings than a stand of large diameter trees; then the boundary between the large and small diameter stands is assumed to occur between and not on the subplots.

3. A boundary or transition zone between fixed radii plots that sample distinctly different condition classes: Separate condition classes are recognized and recorded when a valid attribute obviously differs between two fixed radius plots, but a distinct boundary or indistinct transition zone exists outside the sampled (fixed-radius) area of the subplots. In such cases, a boundary, if present, is not referenced.

Example: The northernmost subplot (2) samples entirely accessible forest land. The other three subplots, 1, 3, and 4, fall clearly in a nonforest meadow. Between subplot 1 and 2 is a transition zone; the number of trees present goes from none to what clearly represents at least

10-percent tree stocking. Two condition classes are sampled: accessible forest land sampled on subplot 2, and nonforest land sampled on the other subplots.

4. Riparian forest area: A riparian forest area is defined as a forest area between 30.0 and 120.0 feet wide, and 1.0 acre or more in size, cumulative, but not necessarily present on both sides of and adjacent to a naturally occurring or artificially created body of water or watercourse with continuous or intermittent flow. Riparian forest areas may be associated with but not limited to streams, rivers, lakes, sloughs, seeps, springs, marsh, beaver ponds, sink holes, cypress domes and ponds, manmade ditches and canals. A riparian forest area must be associated “within forest” and contain at least one distinct and obvious change in a condition class delineation attribute from its adjacent accessible forest land condition class.

Note: When the width of forest adjacent to a stream is between 120.0 feet and 150.0 feet and the width of the riparian forest is at least 30.0 feet wide, the rules for identifying the non-riparian forest

(at least 30.0 feet but less than 120.0 feet) need to be modified. The non-riparian forest can be between 30.0 feet and 120.0 feet and mapped as a separate condition as long as it meets the criteria for delineating a separate condition class, otherwise it will be an inclusion in the riparian forest condition class.

A riparian area (ie. a band of alder trees along a creek within a Sitka spruce condition class) is typically different from the surrounding forest because of forest type. However, a change in any of the 6 condition class delineating variables makes the riparian area a candidate for a riparian area condition class. A riparian condition class only needs to be at least 30.0 feet wide instead of the standard 120.0 feet. It still must be at least 1.0 ac in size, and must be surrounded by forest on at least one side.

An area 30 feet wide needs to be 1452 feet long to be an acre in size. An area 60 feet wide needs to be 726 feet wide, and an area 90 feet wide needs to be 484 feet long.

43

Annual Inventory 2004

V. CONDITION CLASS

Forest type B is a separate condition class (riparian) if the band of it is between 30.0 feet and 120.0 feet wide,

If the stream is < 30.0 feet wide, forest type

B is a separate condition class (riparian) if the sum of the two widths of the bands falls between 30.0 feet and 120.0 feet wide, and is > 1.0 acre in size.

Forest type B is a separate condition class

(riparian) if the band of it is between 30.0 feet and 120.0 feet wide, and is > 1.0 acre in size.

44

Forest type B is a separate condition class (riparian) if the band of it is between

30.0 feet and 120.0 feet wide, and is > 1.0 acre in size.

In a non-forested area, a band of forest type B that is < 120.0 feet wide is NOT considered a riparian area. It is not a separate condition class at all.

If the stream is > 30.0 feet wide, forest type

B is a separate condition class (riparian) if either of the two widths of the bands falls between 30.0 feet and 120.0 feet wide and is > 1.0 acre in size.

Annual Inventory 2004

V. CONDITION CLASS

Item 5--RESERVED STATUS (Resv Status)

Record the code that identifies the reserved designation for the condition. Reserved land is withdrawn by law(s) prohibiting the management of land for the production of wood products (not merely controlling or prohibiting wood harvesting methods). Such authority is vested in a public agency or department, and supersedes rights of ownership. The prohibition against management for wood products cannot be changed through decision of the land manager (management agency) or through a change in land management personnel, but is permanent in nature

Such areas include Congressional designated wilderness areas, National Parks, state parks, or other lands protected by law or deed.

When collected: All accessible forestland condition classes (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1)

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values:

Code Reserve Status

0 Not reserved

1 Reserved

Item 6--OWNER GROUP (Own Group)

Record the OWNER GROUP code identifying the ownership (or the managing Agency for public lands) of the land in the condition class. Conditions will be delineated based on changes in OWNER GROUP only; separate conditions due to changes in OWNER GROUP are recognized only where differences can be clearly identified on the ground when visiting the plot.

When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1)

Field width: 2 digits

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values:

Code Owner Group

10

20

30

40

Forest Service

Other Federal

State and Local Government

Private

Item 7--FOREST TYPE

Record the code corresponding to the FOREST TYPE that best describes the species with the plurality of stocking for all live trees in the condition class that are not overtopped.

If STAND SIZE CLASS is nonstocked, then FOREST TYPE is determined by the following hierarchy:

• For SAMPLE KIND = 2 plots (remeasured plot) , record the FOREST TYPE of the condition at the previous inventory.

• For all other plots:

1. Evaluate any seedlings available to determine the FOREST TYPE.

2. If no seedlings exist, use adjacent stands and your best professional judgment to determine

FOREST TYPE.

Remeasurement Note: Previous (periodic) data has been translated to develop a “forest type” from initial measurements. This data will be available on the print outs in the plot folder. Crews should use the previous forest type as an aid, and should not count on it being 100% accurate. Certain past conditions (Krummholz, multiple species, etc.) may not reflect current forest types. If a previous forest type is “000” then there is likely to be several possible conifer species (mixed) in the condition. Also, there should be a note on the print out if a

Krummholz condition is present on the plot.

45

Annual Inventory 2004

V. CONDITION CLASS

When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1)

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: at least 95% of the time. No MQO when STAND SIZE CLASS=0

Values:

Code Species Type

Spruce / Fir Group

122 white spruce

125 black spruce

Fir / Spruce / Mountain Hemlock Group

264 Pacific silver fir

268 subalpine fir

270 mountain hemlock

271 Alaska-yellow-cedar

Lodgepole Pine Group

281 lodgepole pine

Hemlock / Sitka Spruce Group

301 western hemlock

304 western redcedar

305 Sitka spruce

Elm / Ash / Cottonwood Group

703 cottonwood

Aspen / Birch Group

901 aspen

902 paper birch

Alder / Maple Group

911 red alder

Item 8--STAND SIZE CLASS (Stand Size)

Record the code that best describes the predominant size class of all live trees in the condition class.

When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1)

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values:

Code Stand Size Class Definition

0

1

Nonstocked

< 4.9 inches

(seedlings, sapling)

Meeting the definition of accessible forest land, and the following applies:

Less than 10 percent stocked by trees of any size, and not classified as cover trees (see code 6)

At least 10 percent stocking (or 5 percent crown cover if stocking standards are not available) in trees of any size; and at least 2/3 of the crown cover is in trees less than 5.0 inches d.b.h.

46

Annual Inventory 2004

V. CONDITION CLASS

2

3

4

5

5.0 - 8.9 in (softwoods)

5.0 - 10.9 in (hardwoods)

9.0 - 19.9 in (softwoods)

11.0 - 19.9 in (hardwoods)

20.0 - 39.9 inches

40.0 + inches

At least 10 percent stocking (or 5 percent crown cover if stocking standards are not available) in trees of any size; and at least 1/3 of the crown cover is in trees greater than 5.0 inches d.b.h. and the plurality of the crown cover is in softwoods between 5.0 - 8.9 inches diameter and/or hardwoods between

5.0 - 10.9 inches d.b.h.

At least 10 percent stocking (or 5 percent crown cover if stocking standards are not available) in trees of any size; and at least 1/3 of the crown cover is in trees greater than 5.0 inches d.b.h. and the plurality of the crown cover is in softwoods between 9.0 - 19.9 inches diameter and/or hardwoods between

11.0 - 19.9 inches d.b.h.

At least 10 percent stocking (or 5 percent crown cover if stocking tables are not available) in trees of any size; and at least 1/3 of the crown cover is in trees greater than 5.0 in d.b.h. and the plurality of the crown cover is in trees between 20.0 -

39.9 in d.b.h.

At least 10 percent stocking (or 5 percent crown cover if stocking standards are not available) in trees of any size; and at least 1/3 of the crown cover is in trees greater than 5.0 inches d.b.h. and the plurality of the crown cover is in trees > 40.0 inches d.b.h.

Less than 10 percent stocking by trees of any size, and greater than 5 percent crown cover of species that comprise cover trees

6

Cover trees (trees not on species list, used for plots classified as nonforest)

The instructions in sections A and D (above) apply when delineating, on accessible forest land, contrasting conditions based on differences in STAND SIZE CLASS.

Within the sampled area on a microplot or subplot recognize only very obvious contrasting stands of different mean diameter with an abrupt boundary. Example: an obvious abrupt boundary exists within the sampled

(fixed-radius) area of a subplot and demarcates a stand size class change. Use tree stocking of all live trees that are not overtopped to differentiate between stand-size classes.

Use crown cover as the surrogate for stocking to determine STAND SIZE CLASS. View the plot from the top down and examine crown cover. The stand must have at least 5 percent of the crown cover in STAND

SIZE CLASSES of 1,2,3,4, and 5 or any combination of these STAND SIZE CLASSES; otherwise the STAND

SIZE CLASS is 0. If 2/3 of the crown cover is STAND SIZE CLASS=1, classify the condition as STAND SIZE

CLASS=1. If less than 2/3 of the crown cover is STAND SIZE CLASS=1, classify the condition as STAND

SIZE CLASS=2, 3, 4, or 5 based on which of these STAND SIZE CLASSES has the most crown cover.,

Item 9--REGENERATION STATUS (Regen Status)

Record the code that best describes the artificial regeneration that occurred in the condition.

The instructions in Sections A and C (above) apply when delineating, within accessible forest land, contrasting conditions based on differences in REGENERATION STATUS.

For a forest land condition to be delineated and/or classified as artificially regenerated, the condition must show distinct evidence of planting or seeding. If it is difficult to determine whether or not a stand has been planted or seeded, then use code 0. If no distinct boundary exists within the sampled (fixed-radius) area on any subplot, then do not recognize separate conditions. In many regions of the West, trees are not planted in rows, and planted stands do not differ in physical appearance from natural conditions. In these cases, there is no need to differentiate conditions based on stand origin. Plot records or verbal evidence from landowner is acceptable for determining regeneration status.

47

Annual Inventory 2004

V. CONDITION CLASS

When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1)

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values:

Code Artificial Regeneration Description

0

1

Natural

Artificial

Present stand shows no clear evidence of artificial regeneration. Includes unplanted, recently cut lands.

Present stand shows clear evidence of artificial regeneration.

Item 10--TREE DENSITY

Record a code to indicate the relative tree density classification. Base the classification on the number of stems/unit area, basal area, tree cover, or stocking of all live trees in the condition that are not overtopped, compared to any previously defined condition class TREE DENSITY.

The instructions in sections A and C (above) apply when delineating, within accessible forest land, contrasting conditions based on differences in TREE DENSITY.

Codes 2 and higher are used ONLY when all other attributes used to delineate separate condition classes are homogenous, i.e. when a change in density is the ONLY difference within what would otherwise be treated as only one forest condition. Otherwise, code 1 for all condition classes. Codes 2 and higher are usually, but not always, used to demarcate areas that differ from an adjacent area due to forest disturbance or treatment , e.g., a partial harvest or heavy but not total tree mortality due to a ground fire. Delineation on density should only be done when the less-dense condition is 50 percent or less as dense as the more dense condition.

Do not distinguish between low-stocked stands or stands of sparse and patchy forest.

When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1)

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values:

Code Tree Density

1

2

3

Initial density class

Density class 2 - density different than 1

Density class 3 - density different than 1 and 2

In order to qualify as a separate condition based on density, there MUST be a distinct, easily observed change in the density of an area's tree cover or basal area.

Examples of valid contrasting conditions defined by differences in tree density are:

• The eastern half of an otherwise homogeneous, 20 acre stand has many trees killed by a bark beetle outbreak, or

• One portion of a stand is partially cut over (with 40 square feet basal area per acre) while the other portion is undisturbed (with 100 square feet basal area per acre).

NOTE: In these examples, RESERVED STATUS, OWNER GROUP, FOREST TYPE, STAND SIZE CLASS, and REGENERATION STATUS are the same.

F. ANCILLARY (NON-DELINEATING) VARIABLES

Item 11--OWNER CLASS

Record the OWNER CLASS code that best corresponds to the ownership (or the managing Agency for public lands) of the land in the condition class. Conditions will NOT be delineated based on changes in owner class.

48

Annual Inventory 2004

V. CONDITION CLASS

If multiple owner classes within an OWNER GROUP occur on a single condition class, record the owner class closest to the plot center.

When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1)

Field width: 2 digits

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values:

Owner Classes within Forest Service lands (Owner Group 10):

11 National

12 National

13

Grassland

Other Forest Service

Owner Classes within Other Federal lands (Owner Group 20)

21

22

National Park Service

Bureau of Land Management

23 Fish and Wildlife Service

24 Departments

25 Other

Owner Classes within State and Local Government lands (Owner Group 30)

31 State

32

33

Local (County, Municipality, etc.)

Other Non Federal Public

Owner Classes within Private lands (Owner Group 40)

41 Corporate

42 Non Governmental Conservation / Natural Resources Organization - examples: Nature

43

Conservancy, National Trust for Private Lands, Pacific Forest Trust, Boy Scouts of

America, etc.

Unincorporated Partnerships / Associations / Clubs – examples: Hunting Clubs that own, not lease property, recreation associations, 4H, etc.

44 Native American (Indian) within reservation boundaries

45 Individual

Item 12--ARTIFICIAL REGENERATION SPECIES (Regen Spc)

Record the species code of the predominant tree species for which evidence exists of artificial regeneration in the stand. This attribute is ancillary; that is, contrasting condition classes are never delineated based on variation in this attribute.

When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1) with evidence of artificial regeneration (REGENERATION STATUS = 1)

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values:

CODE SPECIES CODE SPECIES

011

019

042

094

095

098

108

231

Pacific silver fir subalpine fir

242

263

Alaska yellow-cedar 264 white spruce black spruce sitka spruce lodegepole pine

Pacific yew

351

375

746

747 western redcedar western hemlock mountain hemlock red alder paper birch quaking aspen black cottonwood

49

Annual Inventory 2004

V. CONDITION CLASS

Item 13--DISTURBANCE 1 (Dstrb 1)

Record the code corresponding to the presence of the following disturbances. Disturbance can connote positive or negative effects. The area affected by any natural or human-caused disturbance must be at least

1.0 acre in size. Record up to three different disturbances per condition class from most important to least important as best as can be determined. This attribute is ancillary; that is, contrasting conditions are never delineated based on variation in this attribute.

For initial or remeasurement plots, the disturbance must be within the last 5 years.

The following disturbance codes require "significant threshold" damage, which implies mortality and/or damage to 25 percent of all trees in a stand or 50 percent of an individual species’ count. Additionally, some disturbances affect forests but initially may not affect tree growth or health (e.g., grazing, browsing, flooding, etc.). In these cases, a disturbance should be coded when at least 25 percent of the soil surface or understory vegetation has been affected.

Code the general disturbance codes (ie. 10, 40, …) only if one of the more specific codes (ie. 11, 41, ..) does not apply.

When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1)

Field width: 2 digits

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values:

Code Disturbance Definition

00 None

10 Insect damage

11

12

20 Disease damage

21

22

30 Fire

31 ground fire

32 crown fire

40 animal damage

41 Beaver

42 Porcupine

43 deer/ungulate

44 bear

45 rabbit

46 domestic animal or livestock

50 Weather

51 Ice

52 Wind

53 Flooding

54 Drought

55 Earth movement / avalanches

60 Vegetation

70 unknown / unsure / other

80 human caused damage no observable disturbance.

Insect damage to understory vegetation

Insect damage to trees, including seedlings and saplings

Disease damage to understory vegetation

Disease damage to trees, including seedlings and saplings crown or ground fire, prescribed or natural includes flooding caused by beaver includes grazing includes hurricane, tornado weather induced suppression, competition, vines describe in plot notes any significant threshold of human damage, not described in the

DISTURBANCE codes listed or in the TREATMENT codes listed.

Must include plot level note to describe further.

50

Annual Inventory 2004

V. CONDITION CLASS

Item 14--DISTURBANCE YEAR 1 (Distrb1 Yr)

Record the year in which DISTURBANCE 1 occurred. If the disturbance occurs continuously over a period of time, record 9999.

When collected: When DISTURBANCE 1 > 00

Field width: 4 digits

Tolerance: +/- 1 year for measurement cycles of 5 years

+/- 2 years for measurement cycles of > 5 years

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values: Since the previous plot visit, or within the past 5 years for plots visited for the first time

Item 15--DISTURBANCE 2 (Dstrb 2)

If a stand has experienced more than one disturbance, record the second disturbance here. See

DISTURBANCE 1 for coding instructions.

Item 16--DISTURBANCE YEAR 2 (Dstrb2 Yr)

Record the year in which DISTURBANCE 2 occurred. See DISTURBANCE YEAR 1 for coding instructions.

Item 17--DISTURBANCE 3 (Dstrb 3)

If a stand has experienced more than two disturbances, record the third disturbance here. See

DISTURBANCE 1 for coding instructions.

Item 18--DISTURBANCE YEAR 3 (Dstrb3 Yr)

Record the year in which DISTURBANCE 3 occurred. See DISTURBANCE YEAR 1 for coding instructions.

Item 19--TREATMENT 1

Forestry treatments are a form of disturbance. These human disturbances are recorded separately here for ease of coding and analysis. The term treatment further implies that a silvicultural application has been prescribed. This does not include occasional stumps of unknown origin or sparse removals for firewood,

Christmas trees, or other miscellaneous purposes. The area affected by any treatment must be at least 1.0 acre in size. Record up to three different treatments per condition class from most important to least important as best as can be determined. This attribute is ancillary; that is, contrasting conditions are never delineated based on variation in this attribute.

For initial or remeasurement plots, the treatment must be within the last 5 years.

When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1)

Field width: 2 digits

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values:

Code Treatment

30 Artificial regeneration

40 Natural regeneration

Description

00 None

10 Cutting

No observable treatment.

The removal of one or more trees from a stand.

20 Site preparation Clearing, slash burning, chopping, disking, bedding, or other practices clearly intended to prepare a site for either natural or artificial regeneration.

Following a disturbance or treatment (usually cutting), a new stand where at least 50% of the live trees present resulted from planting or direct seeding.

Following a disturbance or treatment (usually cutting), a new stand where at least 50% of the live trees present (of any size) were established through the growth of existing trees and/or natural seeding or sprouting.

51

Annual Inventory 2004

V. CONDITION CLASS

50 Other silvicultural treatment

The use of fertilizers, herbicides, girdling, pruning or other activities (not already listed above) designed to improve the commercial value of the residual stand, or chaining, which is a practice used on western woodlands to encourage wildlife forage.

Item 20--TREATMENT YEAR 1 (Trtmnt1 Yr)

Record the year in which TREATMENT 1 occurred.

When collected: When TREATMENT 1 > 00

Field width: 4 digits

Tolerance: +/- 1 year for measurement cycles of 5 years

+/- 2 years for measurement cycles of > 5 years

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values: Since the previous plot visit, or within the past 5 years for plots visited for the first time

Item 21--TREATMENT 2

If a stand has experienced more than one treatment, record the second treatment here. See TREATMENT 1 for coding instructions, code 00 if none.

Item 22--TREATMENT YEAR 2 (Trtmnt2 Yr)

Record the year in which TREATMENT 2 occurred. See TREATMENT YEAR 1 for coding instructions.

Item 23--TREATMENT 3

If a stand has experienced more than two treatments, record the third treatment here. See TREATMENT 1 for coding instructions, code 00 if none.

Item 24--TREATMENT YEAR 3 (Trtmnt3 Yr)

Record the year in which TREATMENT 3 occurred. See TREATMENT YEAR 1 for coding instructions.

Item 25--PHYSIOGRAPHIC CLASS (Physio Cl)

Record the code that best describes the PHYSIOGRAPHIC CLASS of the condition within the plot area; land form, topographic position, and soil generally determine physiographic class.

When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1)

Field width: 2 digits

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 80% of the time

Values:

Xeric -- Sites that are normally low or deficient in moisture available to support vigorous tree growth.

These areas may receive adequate precipitation, but experience a rapid loss of available moisture due to runoff, percolation, evaporation, etc.

Code Physiographic class Description

11 Dry Tops

12

13

19

Dry Slopes

Deep Sands

Other Xeric

Ridge tops with thin rock outcrops and considerable exposure to sun and wind.

Slopes with thin rock outcrops and considerable exposure to sun and wind. Includes most mountain/steep slopes with a southern or western exposure.

Sites with a deep, sandy surface subject to rapid loss of moisture following precipitation. Typical examples include sand hills, sites along the beach and shores of lakes and streams.

All dry physiographic sites not described above. Describe in condition class notes and on the location record

52

Annual Inventory 2004

V. CONDITION CLASS

Mesic -- Sites that have moderate but adequate moisture available to support vigorous tree growth except for periods of extended drought. These sites may be subjected to occasional flooding during periods of heavy or extended precipitation.

Code Physiographic class Description

21 Flatwoods

22

23

24

25

29

Rolling Uplands

Moist Slopes and

Coves

Narrow Floodplains/

Bottomlands

Broad Floodplains/

Bottomlands

Other Mesic

Flat or fairly level sites outside flood plains. Excludes deep sands and wet, swampy sites.

Hills and gently rolling, undulating terrain and associated small streams. Excludes deep sands, all hydric sites, and streams with associated floodplains.

Moist slopes and coves with relatively deep, fertile soils. Often these sites have a northern or eastern exposure and are partially shielded from wind and sun. Includes moist mountain tops and saddles.

Flood plains and bottomlands less than 1/4-mile in width along rivers and streams. These sites are normally well drained but are subjected to occasional flooding during periods of heavy or extended precipitation. Includes associated levees, benches, and terraces within a 1/4 mile limit. Excludes swamps, sloughs, and bogs

Flood plains and bottomlands 1/4 mile or wider in width along rivers and streams. These sites are normally well drained but are subjected to occasional flooding during periods of heavy or extended precipitation. Includes associated levees, benches, and terraces. Excludes swamps, sloughs, and bogs with year-round water problems.

All moderately moist physiographic sites not described above.

Describe in condition class notes and on the location record.

Hydric -- Sites that generally have a year-round abundance or over-abundance of moisture. Hydric sites are very wet sites where excess water seriously limits both growth and species occurrence.

Code Physiographic class Description

31 Swamps/Bogs

32

33

34

35

39

Small Drains

Bays and wet pocosins

Beaver ponds

Cypress ponds

Other hydric

Low, wet, flat forested areas usually quite extensive that are flooded for long periods of time except during periods of extreme drought. Excludes cypress ponds and small drains.

Narrow, stream-like, wet strands of forestland often without a well-defined stream channel. These areas are poorly drained or flooded throughout most of the year and drain the adjacent higher ground.

Low, wet, boggy sites characterized by peaty or organic soils.

May be somewhat dry during periods of extended drought.

Examples include sites in the Lake States with lowland swamp conifers or the Carolina bays in the southeast US.

All other hydric physiographic sites. Describe in condition class notes and on the location record.

Item 26--AK PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE (NonF Land Use)

Record the Present Nonforest Land Use for all nonforest conditions (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 2), regardless of past condition. Use the codes and classifications listed below.

On all visited plots with an accessible forest land condition class, map nonforest land condition classes present on the 24.0-foot fixed-radius at each subplot.

If a subplot has an accessible forest land condition class present within the 24.0 foot radius, map each nonforest land condition class present. Do not combine nonforest condition classes. Example: if nonforesturban land and nonforest-cropland are both present within a 24.0-foot fixed-radius plot, map each land class as a separate condition class.

53

Annual Inventory 2004

V. CONDITION CLASS

If there are no accessible forest land condition classes present within a subplots 24.0-foot radius, record only the nonforest condition class present at the subplot center. Do not separate nonforest condition classes.

Example: if nonforest-urban land and nonforest-cropland are both present within a 24.0-foot fixed-radius plot, record only the condition class which occupies the subplot center. An exception, always delineate any

Census/Noncensus water and/or Nonsampled.

See Nonforest land on page 36 for information on plots that are entirely nonforest.

When collected: Record the PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE for all nonforest conditions (CONDITION

CLASS STATUS = 2), regardless of past condition.

Field width: 2 digits

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values:

Code Present nonforest land use Definition

10 Agricultural land Land managed for crops, pasture, or other agricultural use; the area must be at least 1.0 acre in size and 120.0 feet wide. Use code 10 only for cases not better described by one of the following

11 Cropland ie. mint, wheat, rye, planted berry fields

12 cultural practices such as grading and mowing

13 Idle farmland

14 Orchard

15 Christmas tree plantation

20 Grass/forb/shrub land Land primarily composed of grasses, forbs, or shrubs (not

30

31

32

33

40

Developed

Cultural or Urban

Rights-of-way

Recreation

Other

wetlands) . This includes lands vegetated naturally or artificially to provide a plant cover managed like native vegetation and does not meet the definition of pasture. The area must be at least 1.0 acre in size and 120.0 feet Wide

Land used primarily by humans for purposes other than forestry or agriculture. Use the code 30 only for land not better described by one of the following:

Business, residential, and other places of intense human activity

Improved roads, railway, power lines, maintained canal

Parks, skiing, golf courses

Land parcels greater than 1.0 acre in size and greater than

120.0 feet wide, that do not fall into one of the uses described above or below . Examples include: noncensus water, recent burns, etc.

41 Naturally nonvegetated Barren rock, sand, lava, glaciers (ice), undeveloped beaches, glacial outwash

42 Vegetated wetlands vegetated lands where at some period in the year, the water table is usually at or near the surface, or the land is covered by shallow water. To consider this code PHYSIOGRAPHIC CLASS should be 31-39. Includes: swamps, peatlands (bogs, fens, muskegs), marshes, and tidal flats

Item 27--AK condition class notes

Record any notes needed to clarify or explain a special situation in the particular Condition Class being defined. Accessible by pushing the F4 key, can enter a note for each defined Condition Class record (column).

When collected: All plots, use when clarification is needed

Field width: 80

Tolerance: N/A

MQO: N/A

Values: Single words and abbreviated sentences

54

Annual Inventory 2004

VI. SUBPLOT INFORMATION

VI. SUBPLOT INFORMATION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Subplot Attributes………………………………………………………….56

Subplot Mapping…………………………………………………………...59

Seedling Data………………………………………………………………64

55

Annual Inventory 2004

VI. SUBPLOT INFORMATION

VI. SUBPLOT INFORMATION

Each subplot is described by a series of area parameters relating to topographic features and existing cover type.

These data also relate to the microplot, since the microplot is contained within the subplot perimeter.

Item 1--SUBPLOT NUMBER

Record the code corresponding to the number of the subplot.

This code will be pre-determined from the Plot Menu of the husky program by selecting chOOse subplot and entering the appropriate subplot number (values shown in the table below). When in the “Subplot Info” screen the subplot number will be shown above the data entry column, verify that this is the subplot you want to enter data for.

When Collected: All subplots

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values:

Code Subplot

1

2

3

4 center subplot north subplot southeast subplot southwest subplot

-Subplot Attributes-

Accessible by entering Subpl info from the Plot Menu

Item 2--SUBPLOT PLOT STATUS (Sbplt Status)

Indicate whether or not this subplot currently has at least one accessible forested condition class.

When collected: All subplots

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values:

1 Sampled – at least one accessible forest land condition present on subplot

2 Sampled – no accessible forest land condition present on subplot

3 Nonsampled

Item 3--AK SUBPLOT NONSAMPLED REASON (NonS Reason)

For entire subplots that cannot be sampled, record one of the following reasons.

When collected: When SUBPLOT PLOT STATUS = 3

Field width: 2 digits

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values:

01 Outside U.S. boundary – Assign this code to condition classes beyond the U.S. border.

02 Denied access area – Any area within the sampled area of a plot to which access is denied by the legal owner, or to which an owner of the only reasonable route to the plot denies access. There are no minimum area or width requirements for a condition class delineated by denied access. Because a denied-access condition can become accessible in the future, it remains in the sample and is re-examined at the next occasion to determine if access is available.

03 Hazardous situation – Any area within the sampled area on plot that cannot be accessed because of a hazard or danger, for example cliffs, quarries, strip mines, illegal substance plantations, temporary high water, etc.

Although the hazard is not likely to change over time, a hazardous condition remains in the sample and is reexamined at the next occasion to determine if the hazard is still present. There are no minimum size or width requirements for a condition class delineated by a hazardous condition.

56

Annual Inventory 2004

VI. SUBPLOT INFORMATION

04 Time limitation – This code applies to full subplots that cannot be sampled due to a time restriction. This code is reserved for areas with limited access, and in situations where it is imperative for the crew to leave before the plot can be completed (e.g., scheduled helicopter rendezvous). Use of this code requires notification to the field supervisor. This code should not be used for an entire plot (use code 8 (skipped visit , Plot level data ) when an entire plot is skipped).

05 Lost data – The plot data file was discovered to be corrupt after a panel was completed and submitted for processing. This code is assigned to entire plots or full subplots that could not be processed, and is applied at the time of processing after notification to the region. Note: This code is for office use only.

10 Other – This code is used whenever a plot or condition class is not sampled due to a reason other than one of the specific reasons already listed. A field note is required to describe the situation.

11 Ocean - Plot falls in ocean water below the mean high tide line. Where rivers or canals enter the ocean, ocean water begins where the river/canal width exceeds ¼ nautical mile.

Item 4--AK estimated nonsample land cover type (NonS Land Cvr)

Record an estimate of what cover type has plurality over the entire subplot area. This variable is only available when SUBPLOT NONSAMPLED REASON = 2, 3, 4, or 10 . For example: if the subplot is nonsampled because of hazardous conditions (as would be entered 03 in SUBPLOT NONSAMPLED REASON above), but the subplot area is stocked with mountain hemlock, then enter 270 for the “estimated nonsample land cover type”.

Note: land cover type includes: Nonforest (002), Noncensus water(003), and Census water(004).

When collected: When SUBPLOT NONSAMPLED REASON = 2, 3, 4, or 10

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: No errors in group or type

MQO: at least 95% of the time in type

Values:

Code Land Cover Type

002 Nonforest

Spruce / Fir Group

Fir / Spruce / Mountain Hemlock Group

271 Alaska-yellow-cedar

Lodgepole Pine Group

Hemlock / Sitka Spruce Group

Elm / Ash / Cottonwood Group

703 cottonwood

Aspen / Birch Group

901 aspen

Alder / Maple Group

57

Annual Inventory 2004

VI. SUBPLOT INFORMATION

Item 5--SUBPLOT CENTER CONDITION

Record the CONDITION CLASS NUMBER of the condition class at the subplot center.

SUBPLOT CENTER CONDITION is selected from the Plot Menu ( cc at centeR ) prior to entering the Subplot information screen.

When collected: All established subplots

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values: 1 to 9

Item 6--MICROPLOT CENTER CONDITION (Microplot Cond)

Record the CONDITION CLASS NUMBER of the condition class at the microplot center.

When collected: All microplots where subplot center is CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1, 2, 3

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values: 1 to 9

Item 7--SUBPLOT SLOPE (Slope)

Record the angle of slope across the 24.0 ft radius subplot to the nearest 1 percent. SUBPLOT SLOPE is determined by sighting the clinometer along a line parallel to the average incline (or decline) of each subplot.

This angle is measured along the shortest pathway down slope before the drainage direction changes. To measure SUBPLOT SLOPE, Observer 1 should stand at the uphill edge of the subplot and sight Observer 2, who stands at the downhill edge of the subplot. Sight Observer 2 at the same height as the eye-level of

Observer 1. Read the slope directly from the percent scale of the clinometer.

• If slope changes gradually across the subplot, record an average slope.

• If slope changes across the subplot but the slope is predominately of one direction, code the predominant slope percentage rather than the average.

• If the subplot falls directly on or straddles a canyon bottom or narrow ridge top, code the average slope of the side hill(s).

• If the subplot falls on a canyon bottom or on a narrow ridge top, but most of the area lies on one side hill, code the slope of the side hill where most of the area lies.

When collected: All subplots with at least one accessible forest land condition present on subplot (SUBPLOT

PLOT STATUS = 1)

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: +/- 10%

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values: 000 to 155

Item 8--SUBPLOT ASPECT (Aspect)

Record the aspect across the 24.0 ft radius subplot, to the nearest 1-degree. SUBPLOT ASPECT is determined along the direction of slope for land surfaces with at least 5 percent slope in a generally uniform direction. SUBPLOT ASPECT is measured with a hand compass along the same direction used to determine slope.

• If aspect changes gradually across the subplot, record an average aspect.

• If aspect changes across the subplot but the aspect is predominately of one direction, code the predominate direction rather than the average.

• If the subplot falls on or straddles a canyon bottom or narrow ridge top, code the aspect of the ridgeline or canyon bottom.

• If the subplot falls on a canyon bottom or on a narrow ridge top, but most of the area lies on one side hill, code the aspect of the side hill.

58

Annual Inventory 2004

VI. SUBPLOT INFORMATION

When collected: All subplots with at least one accessible forest land condition present on subplot (SUBPLOT

PLOT STATUS = 1)

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: +/- 10 degrees

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values:

Code Aspect

000 no aspect, slope < 5 percent

001 1 degree

002 2 degrees

* *

* *

360 360 degrees, due north

Item 9--SNOW/WATER DEPTH (Snow/Water Dept)

Record to the nearest 0.1 foot. the average approximate depth of water, snow, or ice covering the 24.0 ft radius subplot at the time of data collection. This variable is used to indicate plots where some variables (e.g. seedling count, total lengths) may be measured with less certainty due to conditions at the time of measurement.

This item is intended for water/snow/ice which covers substantial portions of subplots. Do not record the depth of streams or other water sources if contained within their established banks and are not affecting tree or vegetation measurements.

When collected: All subplots with at least one accessible forest land condition present on subplot (SUBPLOT

PLOT STATUS=1)

Field width: 2 digits (x.y)

Tolerance: +/- 0.5 ft

MQO: at the time of measurement (no MQO after initial date of visit)

Values: 0.0 to 9.9

Item 10--AK subplot notes

Record any notes needed to clarify or explain a special situation encountered on the Subplot.

Accessible by pushing the F4 key while in the Subplot Information screen

When collected: As needed

Field width: 40

Tolerance: N/A

MQO: N/A

Values: Single words and abbreviated sentances

- Subplot Mapping -

Accessible by selecting Subpl info in the Plot Menu.

BOUNDARY REFERENCES

Boundary reference data are used to compute the area for the condition classes sampled on a plot and to remeasure plots. Record all boundaries between condition classes that occur within the sampled (fixed-radius) area on subplots and microplots. Boundaries outside sampled (fixed-radius) areas are not referenced.

In addition to using the recording procedures described herein, sketch maps of condition class boundaries onto the pre-printed plot diagrams on paper field tally sheets.

BOUNDARIES ON REMEASUREMENT PLOTS

When re-visiting a plot that has previous boundary mapping of condition classes, it is important not to be too critical of slight differences in azimuth and distance numbers. If the previous mapping is generally similar to the current boundary configuration, then do not change previous numbers. However, if there is a significant change in condition classes, a gross error by the previous crew, or a change in the procedures from what was initially used; then apply the appropriate AK CHANGE BOUNDARY code and enter the correct boundary data.

59

Annual Inventory 2004

VI. SUBPLOT INFORMATION

REFERENCE PROCEDURE

Reference, within the sampled area on each microplot and subplot the approximate boundary of each condition class that differs from the condition classes at a subplot center. Trees selected on these fixed-radius plots are assigned to the actual condition in which they lie regardless of the recorded approximate boundary delineated.

Subplot boundary referencing is done by recording azimuths and distances from subplot center to the reference points and/or from microplot center to the reference points (see examples on page 63). Each boundary is marked by a maximum of three points - two where the boundary intersects the subplot circumference or microplot circumference, and one "corner" point between the two end points, if necessary. Only the corner point requires a distance, since the distance from the center to the circumference is always equal to the fixed plot radius.

Microplot boundaries are referenced from the microplot center

Refer to section A on page 34 and section D page 38 for the general condition class delineation guidelines.

For

Condition class status (B) and Accessible Forest Land (E) on pages 34 and 42 . The following additional rules apply when referencing a boundary within a subplot or microplot:

1. When a boundary between accessible forest land and nonforest land or between two contrasting accessible forest land condition classes is clearly marked, use that feature to define the boundary.

Examples of clear demarcation are a fence line, plowed field edge, sharp ridgeline, defined stem line , and water's edge along a stream course, ditch, or canal.

2. When a boundary between forest land and nonforest land is not clearly marked by an obvious feature, the boundary should follow the nonforest side of the stems of the trees at the forest edge.

3. When a boundary between two contrasting forest land condition classes is not clearly marked, map along the stems of the contrasting condition. When the boundary between two contrasting forest land condition classes is separated by a narrow linear inclusion (creek, fire line, narrow meadow, unimproved road), establish the boundary at the far edge, relative to subplot center, of the inclusion.

4. When a plot is remeasured, the crew will examine the boundaries referenced at last inventory. If no change has occurred, the current crew will retain the boundary data that were recorded at last inventory. If a boundary has changed, or a new boundary is present, or the previous crew made an obvious error, record new or updated boundary data. Delete boundaries that are no longer distinct.

5. Although individual MQOs are specified for the azimuths and distances, in practice a crew will be considered ‘correct’ when the difference in areas as mapped by the original crew and by the QA crew is less than 10 percent of the subplot or microplot area. This allows for slight variations in azimuths or distances due to the approximate nature of mapping procedures.

BOUNDARY DATA

Record the appropriate value for each of the following data items for each boundary mapped on the subplot or microplot.

If no boundaries are recorded for a subplot, enter one record with PLOT TYPE = 0.

Item 1--SUBPLOT NUMBER

Record the code corresponding to the number of the subplot.

This code will be pre-determined from the Plot Menu of the husky program by selecting chOOse subplot and entering the appropriate subplot number (values shown in the table below). When in the “Subplot Mapping” screen the subplot number will be shown in the upper right end of the top row, make sure that this is the subplot you want to enter data for.

When collected: All boundaries

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values:

60

Annual Inventory 2004

VI. SUBPLOT INFORMATION

Code Subplot number

1 center subplot

2 north subplot

3 southeast subplot

4 southwest subplot

Item 2--PLOT TYPE (P)

Record the code to specify whether the boundary data are for a subplot or microplot.

If no boundaries are recorded for a subplot, enter one record with PLOT TYPE = 0.

When collected: All boundaries

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values:

Code Plot Type

0

1

2

No boundaries are recorded for the subplot

Subplot boundary

Microplot boundary

Item 3--AK BOUNDARY CHANGE (B)

Remeasurement (SAMPLE KIND = 2) locations only. Record the appropriate code to indicate the relationship between previously recorded and current boundary information.

When collected: SAMPLE KIND = 2, All boundaries

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values:

Code Description

0 No change - boundary is the same as indicated on plot map and/or data collected by a previous crew.

1 New boundary, or boundary data has been changed to reflect an actual on-theground physical change resulting in a difference from the boundaries recorded.

2 Boundary has been changed to correct an error from previous crew.

3 Boundary has been changed to reflect a change in variable definition.

Item 4--CONTRASTING CONDITION (C)

Record the CONDITION CLASS NUMBER of the condition class that contrasts with the condition class located at the subplot center (for boundaries on the subplot) or at the microplot center (for boundaries on the microplot), e.g., the condition class present on the other side of the boundary line.

When collected: All boundariesField width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values: 1 to 9

61

Annual Inventory 2004

VI. SUBPLOT INFORMATION

Item 5--LEFT AZIMUTH (LAzm)

Record , in degrees, the azimuth from the subplot or microplot center to the farthest left point (facing the contrasting condition class) where the boundary intersects the subplot or microplot circumference.

When collected: All boundaries

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: +/- 10 degrees

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values: 001 to 360

Item 6--RIGHT AZIMUTH (RAzm)

Record , in degrees, the azimuth from the subplot or microplot center to the farthest right point (facing the contrasting condition class) where the boundary intersects the subplot or microplot plot circumference.

When collected: All boundaries

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: +/- 10- degrees

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values: 001 to 360

Item 7--CORNER AZIMUTH (CAzm)

Record , in degrees , the azimuth from the subplot or microplot center to a corner or curve in a boundary. If a boundary is best described by a straight line between two circumference points, then record 000 for CORNER

AZIMUTH.

When collected: All boundaries

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: +/- 10 degrees

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values: 000 to 360 ( 000=None )

Item 8--CORNER DISTANCE (Cdist)

Record the horizontal distance, to the nearest 1 foot, from the subplot or microplot center to a boundary corner point.

When collected: All boundaries when CORNER AZIMUTH > 000

Field width: 2 digits

Tolerance: +/- 1 ft

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values:

Plot Type Values for Corner Distance

Microplot 01 to 07 ft (actual limiting distance is 6.8 ft.)

Subplot 01 to 24 ft.

62

Annual Inventory 2004

VI. SUBPLOT INFORMATION

Boundary mapping examples

How to measure a straight boundary on a microplot or subplot.

How to measure a boundary with a corner on a microplot or subplot.

Item 9--AK boundary notes

Record any notes needed to clarify or explain a special situation in the particular Boundary being defined.

Accessible by pushing the F4 key, can enter a note for each individual boundary record (line).

When collected: As needed

Field width: 40

Tolerance: N/A

MQO: N/A

Values: Single words and abbreviated sentances

63

Annual Inventory 2004

VI. SUBPLOT INFORMATION

- Seedling Data -

Accessible by selecting Subpl info in the Plot Menu.

Stocking, regeneration, and biomass information are obtained by counting live seedlings within the 6.8-foot radius microplot located 90 degrees and 12.0 feet from each subplot center within each of the four subplots. The base of the seedling (center of bole) must be at or within the 6.8 foot radius in order to qualify for counting. Conifer seedlings must be at least 0.5 foot in length and less than 1.0 inch at DBH in order to qualify for tallying. Hardwood seedlings must be at least 1.0 foot in length and less than 1.0 inch at DBH in order to qualify for tallying. Seedlings are counted singly or in groups by species, condition class, and length class. Only count seedlings occurring in accessible forest land condition classes.

Item 1--SUBPLOT NUMBER

Note: Subplot number will be shown in the upper right corner of the SEEDLING DATA screen (and will not be editable in the screen). This number will have been determined by selecting the appropriate subplot in the chOOse subplot screen (available in the Plot Menu).

When Collected: All counts of seedlings

Field width: 1

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: 100 % of the time

Values: 1-4

Item 2--SPECIES

Record the appropriate species code from the list provided below. If you encounter a species not listed and are not sure if it should be tallied as a tree seedling, consult with your Field Supervisor. If the species cannot be determined in the field, tally the seedling, but bring branch samples, foliage, flowers, bark, etc. to your supervisor for identification. If possible collect samples outside the subplots from similar specimens and make a note to correct the SPECIES code later.

When Collected: All counts of seedlings

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: No errors for genus, no errors for species

MQO: At least 90% of the time for genus, at least 85% of the time for species

Values:

CODE SPECIES CODE SPECIES

011

019

042

094

095

098

108

231

Pacific silver fir subalpine fir

Alaska yellow-cedar white spruce black spruce sitka spruce lodegepole pine

Pacific yew

242

263

264

351

375

746

747 western redcedar western hemlock mountain hemlock red alder paper birch quaking aspen black cottonwood

Item 3--CONDITION CLASS NUMBER

Assign the appropriate CONDITION CLASS NUMBER (as defined in the CONDITION CLASS chapter) to the seedling or group of seedlings that are rooted in the respective condition. Remember, seedling counts are not to be performed in non-forest conditions.

When Collected: All counts of seedlings

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values: 1-9

General Seedling Count Rules:

• Multiple “suckers” that originate from the same location, and stump sprouts are considered one seedling.

• Do not tally any seedlings that sprout from a live tally tree.

64

Annual Inventory 2004

VI. SUBPLOT INFORMATION

• Do not tally or count “layers” (undetached tree branches partially or completely covered by soil and/or organic materials, usually at the base) as seedlings.

Item 4--AK seedling count, length class 1

Record the total number of conifer seedlings that fall into the length range:

≥ 0.5 foot and < 1.0 foot

If there are no conifer seedlings for this length class then record 000

When collected: When SPECIES = 010 - 299

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: ± 5

MQO: 90% of the time

Values: 010-299

Item 5--AK seedling count, length class 2

Record the total number of conifer or hardwood seedlings that fall into the length range:

≥ 1.0 foot and < 2.5 feet

If there are no conifer or hardwood seedlings for this length class then record 000

When collected: When SPECIES = 010 - 999

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: ± 5

MQO: 90% of the time

Values: 010 - 999

Item 6--AK seedling count, length class 3

Record the total number of conifer or hardwood seedlings that fall into the length range:

≥ 2.5 feet and < 4.5 feet .

If there are no conifer or hardwood seedlings for this length class then record 000

When collected: When SPECIES = 010 - 999

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: ± 2

MQO: 90% of the time

Values: 010 - 999

Item 7--AK seedling count, length class 4

Record the total number of conifer or hardwood seedlings that fall into the length range:

≥ 4.5 feet

If there are no conifer or hardwood seedlings for this length class then record 000

When collected: When SPECIES = 010 - 999

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: ± 2

MQO: 90% of the time

Values: 010 - 999

Item 8--AK seedling notes

Record any notes needed to clarify or explain a special situation in the particular Seedling record being defined. Accessible by pushing the F4 key,

When collected: As needed

Field width: 40

Tolerance: N/A

MQO: N/A

Values: Single words and abbreviated sentances

65

Annual Inventory 2004

VII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

VII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

Table of Contents

A. Introduction……………………………………………………………………..67

B. Determining if a tree/sapling/seedling

is selected on a fixed-radius plot

C. Tree and sapling data

D. Notes on Tree Record Data Entry

(Field Data Recorder)

Item 5--AK PRESENT TREE STATUS…………………………………………70

Item 17--DIAMETER (DBH)……………………………………………………..75

Item 19--AK 10-YR INCREMENT……………………………………………….80

Item 23--COMPACTED CROWN RATIO………………………………………82

Item 28--AK MORTALITY YEAR………………………………………………..85

66

Annual Inventory 2004

VII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

VII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

A. Introduction

Trees and snags (> 5.0 in. d.b.h.) are sampled using the 1/24 acre fixed-radius subplot. Each subplot has a fixedradius of 24.0 feet horizontal. HORIZONTAL DISTANCE and AZIMUTH for trees and snags ( ≥ 5.0 in d.b.h.) are measured from the appropriate subplot center.

Saplings (1.0 in. to 4.9 in. d.b.h.) are sampled more efficiently using the small fixed-radius microplot. Each microplot has a fixed-radius of 6.8 feet horizontal. Saplings must be live at time of measurement. DISTANCE and

AZIMUTH for live saplings are measured from microplot center.

B. Determining if a tree/sapling/seedling is selected on a fixed-radius plot

Trees/saplings/seedlings are selected for measurement only when the distance from their bole center (a.k.a. pith) at the ground, to the subplot center is less than the radius of that subplot/microplot plot (see figure below).

Note: The method for determining whether a tree/sapling is selected for mesaurement in the previous (periodic)

Alaska inventory is different than current annual procedures. Previously a tree/sapling was selected for measurement if the bole center of the tree at dbh was at or within the fixed plot radius. Note that in this inventory, the tree/sapling will be selected if the bole center at the ground is within the fixed plot radius. There is no difference in method between both types of inventory for Seedling selection on the fixed plot radius

Trees at least 5.0 inches in diameter are sampled within the 24.0 foot subplot. ‘Tally trees’ are defined as all live and standing dead trees in accessible forest land condition classes encountered on the subplot the first time a subplot is established, and all trees that grow into a subplot thereafter. These data yield information on tree volume, growth, mortality, and removals; wildlife habitats; forest structure and composition; biomass; and carbon sequestration.

Trees with a diameter at least 1.0 inch but less than 5.0 inches, termed saplings, are sampled within the microplot. ‘ Tally saplings ’ are defined as all live saplings in accessible forest land condition classes encountered the first time a microplot is established, and all saplings that grow into each microplot thereafter are included until they grow to 5.0 inches or larger, at which time they are tallied on the 24.0 foot subplot and referenced (new AZIMUTH and HORIZONTAL DISTANCE taken) to the subplot center.

Trees are alive if they have any living parts (leaves, buds, cambium) at or above the point of diameter measurement (DBH). Trees that have been temporarily defoliated are still alive.

Once tallied, dead trees over 5.0 inches in diameter are tracked until they no longer qualify as standing dead.

Working around dead trees is a safety hazard - crews should exercise extreme caution! Trees that are deemed unsafe to measure should be estimated.

To qualify as a standing dead tally tree, dead trees must be at least 5.0 inches in diameter, have a bole which has an unbroken ACTUAL LENGTH of at least 4.5 feet, and lean less than 45 degrees from vertical.

67

Annual Inventory 2004

VII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

“ Unbroken ” is defined as at least 50 percent attached to the original source of growth. The degree of lean on dead trees with partially separated (i.e., 1 to 50 percent) boles is measured from the base of the tree to the top of ACTUAL LENGTH.

Portions of boles on dead trees that are separated greater than 50 percent (either above or below 4.5 feet), are considered severed and are included in Down Woody Materials (DWM) if they otherwise meet DWM tally criteria.

Live and dead standing tally trees, and partially separated boles of dead tally trees, do not have to be selfsupported. They may be supported by other trees, branches, or their crown.

Trees that have been cut above DBH qualify as tally trees, provided they meet the size (DBH) requirement.

The following apply at remeasurement:

ƒ If at the previous visit a forked tree was recorded as two separate trees but should have been recorded as one tree, delete one tree and correct the diameter for the remaining tree. Record an explanation in

TREE NOTES.

ƒ If at the previous visit a forked tree was recorded as one tree but should have been recorded as two separate trees, correct the diameter for the remeasured tree to represent one tree, and add the other fork as a new tree. Record an explanation in TREE NOTES.

Begin tallying trees at an azimuth of 001 degrees from subplot center and continue clockwise around the subplot. Repeat this sequence for trees on the microplot.

C. Tree and sapling data

Follow the steps below:

1.) If the condition class is accessible forest land (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1) follow these steps for trees/saplings in the condition class: a) Tally all trees live and ≥ 5.0 in. d.b.h. that are within the 24.0 ft. subplot.

Assign a PRESENT TREE STATUS = 1. b) Tally all trees standing dead, ≥ 5.0 in. d.b.h., ≥ 4.5 feet tall, leaning < 45 degrees from vertical, that are within the 24.0 ft. subplot.

Assign a PRESENT TREE STATUS = 2. c) Tally all live trees 1.0 to 4.9 in. d.b.h. that are within the 6.8 ft. microplot.

Assign a PRESENT TREE STATUS = 1.

2.) If the condition class is NOT accessible forest land (Nonforest, Nonsampled, Census/Noncensus Water):

Do not tally live trees, saplings, dead trees (snags), or seedlings

D. Notes on Tree Record Data Entry (Field Data Recorder)

Record one line on the data recorder for each tree sampled. Required data items for these trees vary by subplot, condition class and tree status. Use this section to determine which items to complete for a particular kind of tree.

For each condition class where there are no tree records for the condition class other than TREE STATUS of 2

(snag), or 9 (witness-only) within the 24.0 feet of subplot center, record one line with the subplot number, the condition class number, a PRESENT TREE STATUS of "N" and enter "NO TALLY" in tree notes. If all forest condition classes within subplot 1 are "NO TALLY", two additional records are required to witness subplot center.

These witness records can represent sound stumps or snags, but live trees are preferable

68

Annual Inventory 2004

VII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

If both a forest and/or nonforest condition class is mapped on a subplot's 24.0-foot fixed-radius plot, enter one line for each nonforest condition class; for each of these records, enter the subplot number, condition class number, and a PRESENT TREE STATUS of N, and enter "NO TALLY" in tree notes.

Item 1--SUBPLOT NUMBER

Record the subplot number where the tree occurs.

Note: Subplot number will be shown in the lower left corner of the TREE & SAPLING DATA screen (and will not be editable in the screen). This number will have been determined by selecting the appropriate subplot in the chOOse subplot screen in the Plot Menu.

When Collected: All live and standing dead tally trees > 1.0 in d.b.h., witness only trees

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values:

1 Center subplot

2 North subplot

3 Southeast subplot

4 Southwest subplot

Item 2--TREE RECORD NUMBER (Trn)

Record a code to uniquely and permanently identify each tree on a given subplot. The TREE RECORD

NUMBERS must be unique within a subplot – being unique is more important than being sequential. In general, work clockwise from azimuth 001 to 360, and work outwards from subplot center to subplot perimeter.

On remeasured plots, use the previously assigned tree number. Saplings tallied on microplots will retain their initially assigned tree number if they grow to tree size. Missed trees will be assigned the next available tree number. DO NOT renumber all plot trees in order to assign a more “correct” tree number to a missed tree.

Numbers assigned to trees that are subsequently found to be extra will be dropped and not reused.

All tree record numbers will be “written” on the matching tree with a orange (or other bright color) paint sticks/crayons, try to place the number facing plot center.

For SAMPLE KIND = 1 plots the TREE RECORD NUMBER will start at 001 with the first tree and continue in sequence. If after entering several trees you find that a tree was missed, go ahead and add it even though the tree record number will not match the sequence based on Azimuth.

On remeasured plots (SAMPLE KIND = 2) the tree record numbers will be downloaded from the previous visit. Any additional trees during the current visit will be given the next number (in sequence) after the highest downloaded tree record number. Be sure to account for all trees (using RECONCILE codes if needed) that were recorded during the previous sample.

When collected: All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 in dbh and standing dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 in, witness only trees

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of time

Values: 000, 001 to 999

Item 3--CONDITION CLASS NUMBER (C)

Record the CONDITION CLASS NUMBER in which each tree is located. Often, a referenced boundary is approximate, and trees selected for tally are assigned to the actual condition in which they lie regardless of the recorded approximate boundary

69

Annual Inventory 2004

VII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

Ragged CONDITION CLASS boundary and tree condition class designation.

When Collected: All trees

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values: 1 to 9

Item 4--AK PREVIOUS TREE STATUS (p)

If not downloaded from the previous inventory, record PREVIOUS TREE STATUS for each remeasured tally tree. This code is used to track the status of sample trees over time. This information is needed to correctly assign volume information to the proper component of volume change.

When Collected: On remeasurement plots (SAMPLE KIND = 2), downloaded for all previously tallied trees

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance; No errors

MQO: At least 95% of the time

Values:

1 Live Tree alive at previous inventory

2 Dead Tree standing dead tree at the previous inventory

Item 5--AK PRESENT TREE STATUS (S)

Record a current PRESENT TREE STATUS for each tallied tree; this code is used to track the status of sample trees over time: as they first appear, as ingrowth, as they survive, and when they die or are removed. This information is needed to correctly assign volume information to the proper component of volume change.

When collected: All new live tally trees > 1.0 inches d.b.h.,

All new dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 inches d.b.h. witness only trees

On remeasurement plots, all previously tallied trees

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of time

Values:

70

Annual Inventory 2004

VII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

0

1

2

3

9

N

X

No Status

Live Tree

Dead Tree

Removed

Witness Only

No Live Tally

Remeasurement plots only. Tree is not presently in the sample. Tree was incorrectly tallied at the previous inventory or currently is not tallied due to definition or procedural change , or is not tallied due to natural causes.

Requires RECONCILE code=5-8

Live tree (new, remeasured or ingrowth)

Any dead tree (new, remeasured or ingrowth) regardless of cause of death

Includes all previously standing dead trees that no longer qualify as standing dead, as well as trees killed by sivicultural or land clearing activity, and are assumed not to have been utilized..

Stumps meeting size and lean criteria are tallied as dead trees.

Remeasurement plots only. Tree that has been cut or removed by direct human activity related to harvesting, silvicultural activity or land clearing.

The tree is assumed to have been utilized.

A subplot witness that is not a tally tree

Used for each condition class without live tally trees (TREE STATUS 1)

Delete Record Deletes a record inadvertently entered.

Note: On remeasurement plots , crews must collect new AZIMUTH and HORIZONTAL DISTANCE information from the subplot center for microplot saplings that grow to become subplot trees. For live subplot trees that shrink to become live saplings on the microplot, crews must collect new AZIMUTH and

HORIZONTAL DISTANCE information from the microplot center.

Item 6--AK subplot witness flag

The subplot witness flag is activated by pushing the letter “v” key while PRESENT TREE STATUS is highlighted with the cursor. This flag identifies the current record as either a witness tree (with an asterisk * ) or as a witness rock, shrub, or other-specify (with a plus + ). When activated, an asterisk (*) will appear and

SLOPE DISTANCE from witness tree to subplot center will be added to the “required to collect” variable list.

Pushing “v” again will toggle the plus (+) to appear, which signifies a witness type other than a tree (rock, shrub, other-specify). If a plus (+) is selected then only AZIMUTH, HORIZONTAL DISTANCE, SLOPE

DISTANCE, and TREE NOTES will be required

If the PRESENT TREE STATUS = 9 , then only the plus (+) will be allowed (no subplot witness flag = a non tally witness tree).

If plus (+) is selected, then enter a note in the current record describing the shrub species, rock size, or other object used.

If either the asterisk or plus appear in error, then push the “v” button (while PRESENT TREE STATUS is highlighted with the cursor) until it is no longer visible.

When collected: When the selected tree/object is to be used for a witness or when PRESENT TREE

STATUS = 9 and it is not a tree (when non-tally witness is a rock, shrub, other-specify)

Field width: 1

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 95% of the time

Values:

Code Description blank

* (asterisk) current record is a witness tree

+ (plus) current record is not a witness current record is a witness rock, shrub, other-specify

71

Annual Inventory 2004

VII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

Item 7--AK STANDING DEAD

Record the code that describes whether the tree qualifies as standing dead or not. To qualify as a standing dead tally tree, dead trees must be at least 5.0 inches in diameter, have a bole which has an unbroken

ACTUAL LENGTH of at least 4.5 feet, and lean less than 45 degrees from vertical.

“Unbroken” is defined as at least 50 percent attached to the original source of growth. The degree of lean on dead trees with partially separated (i.e., 1 to 50 percent) boles is measured from the base of the tree to the top of ACTUAL LENGTH.

Portions of boles on dead trees that are separated greater than 50 percent (either above or below 4.5 feet), are considered severed and are included in Down Woody Materials (DWM) if they otherwise meet DWM tally criteria.

Live and dead standing tally trees, and partially separated boles of dead tally trees, do not have to be selfsupported. They may be supported by other trees, branches, or their crown.

When collected: SAMPLE KIND = 2 only: All dead tally trees (PRESENT TREE STATUS = 2)

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values:

0

1

No – tree does not qualify as standing dead

Yes – tree does qualify as standing dead

72

Annual Inventory 2004

VII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

Item 8--AK RECONCILE (I)

For remeasurement locations only, record a RECONCILE code for any new tally tree that was not tallied in the previous inventory, and for all no status remeasurement trees (PRESENT TREE STATUS=0). This code is used to identify the reason a new tree appeared in the inventory, and identify the reason a remeasurement tree no longer qualifies as a tally tree. This information is needed to correctly assign volume information to the proper component of volume change.

When Collected: On SAMPLE KIND=2; all new live tally trees ≥ 1.0 in DBH (PRESENT TREE STATUS = 1 and no PREVIOUS TREE STATUS), all new dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 in (PRESENT TREE STATUS = 2 and no

PREVIOUS TREE STATUS), all no status trees (PRESENT TREE STATUS=0)

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 95% of the time

Values:

Codes 1-4 are valid for new trees on the plot:

1 Ingrowth – new tally tree not qualifying as through growth (includes reversions).

2 Through growth – new tally tree 5 inches DBH/DRC and larger, within the microplot.

3 Missed live – a live tree missed at previous inventory and that is live, dead or removed now.

4 Missed dead – a dead tree missed at previous inventory and that is dead or removed now.

Codes 5-8 are valid for remeasured trees that no longer qualify as tally:

5 Shrank – live tree that shrank below threshold diameter on microplot/subplot

6 Missing – tree was tallied in previous inventory, but is now missing due to natural causes such as landslide, fire, etc.

7 Cruiser error – erroneously tallied at previous inventory

8 Procedural change – tree was tallied at the previous inventory, but is no longer tallied due to a definition or procedural change

Code 5 is used to indicate live trees that shrink below the diameter threshold on the microplot/subplot. For example, if a live remeasurement tree shrinks below the 5.0 inch DBH on the subplot, then record the following combination of codes: PREVIOUS TREE STATUS = 1, PRESENT TREE STATUS = 0, RECONCILE = 5. If a live measured tree shrinks below the 5.0 inch threshold on the subplot and is currently greater than or equal to

1.0 inch on the microplot, then record PREVIOUS TREE STATUS = 1, PRESENT TREE STATUS = 1.

Record all required items for a tally sapling.

Item 9--AK previous species (sPc)

When visiting previously installed plots (SAMPLE KIND = 2), all of the previous species calls in the tree record will be downloaded into the current SPECIES field. The previous code will aid in tree reconciliation and will help correct any errors made in the previous visit. If there is an obvious error in the species call, then feel free to correct it with the values given under SPECIES below. If the downloaded species appears to be correct then move on to the next Item (previous azimuth in the AZIMUTH field).

When collected: SAMPLE KIND = 2, All trees, previous visit call will be downloaded and needs to be checked for obvious errors

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time for genus, at least 95% of the time for species

Values: See SPECIES code table below

Item 10--SPECIES (sPc)

Record the appropriate SPECIES code from the list provided. If you encounter a species not listed and are not sure if it should be tallied as a tree, consult your Crew Leader/Unit Coordinator . If the species cannot be determined in the field, tally the tree, but bring branch samples, foliage, cones, flowers, bark, etc. to your supervisor for identification. If possible, collect samples outside the subplots from similar specimens and make a note to correct the SPECIES code later. Use code 0299 for unknown dead conifer and 0998 for unknown dead hardwood when the genus or species codes cannot be used. The generic code should only be used when you are sure the species is on the species list, but you cannot differentiate among acceptable species.

73

Annual Inventory 2004

VII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

This is often the case with standing dead trees on newly established plots. In this case use the sample collections procedures described earlier in this paragraph.

When Collected: All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 in d.b.h. and standing dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 in d.b.h.

Field width: 3 digits all witnesses unless AK subplot witness flag = +

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time for genus, at least 95% of the time for species

Values:

CODE SPECIES

011 Pacific fir 242 western fir

CODE SPECIES redcedar

263 western yellow-cedar

094 white 351 red

095 black spruce

375 paper aspen pine 747 black yew

Item 11--AK previous azimuth (aZm)

When visiting previously installed plots (SAMPLE KIND = 2), all of the previous azimuth calls in the tree record will be downloaded into the current AZIMUTH field. The previous code will aid in tree reconciliation and will help correct any errors made in the previous visit. If there is an obvious error in the azimuth call, then feel free to correct it with the values given under AZIMUTH below. If the downloaded azimuth appears to be correct then move on to the next Item (previous distance in the HORIZONTAL DISTANCE field).

When collected: SAMPLE KIND = 2, All trees, previous visit call will be downloaded and needs to be checked for obvious errors

Field width 3 digits

Tolerance: +/- 10 degrees

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values: 001 to 360

NOTE: In the previous inventory, azimuth was measured to the center of bole at dbh. This inventory measures azimuth to the center of bole at the base (ground) of the tree. Make sure that previous azimuths match current methods for all new and remeasured trees/saplings.

Item 12--AZIMUTH (aZm)

Record the AZIMUTH from the subplot center (for trees ≥ 5.0 inches d.b.h.) or the microplot center (trees ≥ 1.0 inch and < 5.0 inches d.b.h.), sight the center of the base of each tree with a compass. Record AZIMUTH to the nearest degree. Use 360 for north.

Note: For microplot trees (saplings) which become trees (at the time of plot remeasurement) , crews must collect new azimuth and distance information from the subplot center.

When Collected: All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 in d.b.h. and standing dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 in d.b.h. , all witnesses

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: +/- 10 degrees

MQO: At least 90% of time

Values: 001 to 360

Item 13--AK previous horizontal distance (Hdis)

When visiting previously installed plots (SAMPLE KIND = 2), all of the previous horizontal distance calls in the tree record will be downloaded into the current HORIZONTAL DISTANCE field. The previous code will aid in tree reconciliation and will help correct any errors made in the previous visit. If there is an obvious error in the horizontal distance call, then feel free to correct it with the values given under HORIZONTAL DISTANCE below. If the downloaded horizontal distance appears to be correct then move on to the next Item.

NOTE: Previous (periodic) methods for Horizontal Distance required the center of the tree bole at dbh be at or within the fixed plot radius. Current methods require the measurement at the center of the tree bole at the base

(ground). Be aware that old distances may be “off”, requiring accurate measurements using the new methodology.

74

Annual Inventory 2004

VII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

When collected: SAMPLE KIND = 2, All trees, previous visit call will be downloaded and needs to be checked for obvious errors

Field width: 3 digits (xx.y)

Tolerance: Microplot: +/- 0.2 ft

Subplot: +/- 1.0 ft

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values: Microplot: 00.1 to 06.8

Subplot: 00.1 to 24.0

Item 14--HORIZONTAL DISTANCE (Hdis)

Record the measured HORIZONTAL DISTANCE, to the nearest 0.1 foot, from the subplot center (for trees ≥

5.0 inches d.b.h.) or microplot center (for trees ≥ 1.0 inch and < 5.0 inches d.b.h.) to the pith of the tree at the base.

When Collected: All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 in d.b.h. and standing dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 in d.b.h. all witnesses

Field width: 3 digits (xx.y)

Tolerance: Microplot: +/- 0.2 ft

Subplot: +/- 1.0 ft

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values: Microplot: 00.1 to 06.8

Subplot: 00.1 to 24.0

Item 15--AK slope distance to witness (sdi)

Record the slope distance, to the nearest 0.1 foot, from the subplot center pin to the head of the nail that affixes the aluminum round/tag at the base of the witness tree (or, to the face of the object selected as a witness-explain in tree notes).

When collected: All witnesses

Field width: 3 digits (xx.y)

Tolerance: +/- 0.2 feet

MQO: At least 90 % of the time

Values: 00.1 to 99.9

Item 16--AK previous diameter at breast height (pdia)

This is the DBH assigned by the field crew during the previous visit (converted from metric to english). It has been downloaded from the previous inventory and will not be editable by the current field crew. This variable is provided to aid in tree reconciliation and to account for any possible errors made in the previous visit.

When collected: When SAMPLE KIND = 2, All downloaded live tally trees/saplings ≥ 1.0 inch d.b.h., all downloaded standing dead tally trees

Field width: 4 digits

Tolerance: N/A

MQO: N/A

Values: 001.0 to 999.9

Item 17--DIAMETER (Diam)

Diameters are measured at breast height (4.5 feet above ground line on the uphill side of the tree). Trees with diameters ≥ 1.0 inch and < 5.0 inches are measured on the 6.8 foot radius microplot, those with diameters of ≥ 5.0 inches are measured on the 24 foot radius subplots.

Diameters are used in calculating volume, growth, average stand diameter, and stocking-related estimates such as forest type and stand size

Marking Current Diameter:

1. Marking d.b.h. on trees previously marked:

The place where diameter was measured at the previous visit on trees tallied live and ≥ 3.0 in. d.b.h. was marked with an aluminum nail. On these trees, remeasure diameter at the location of the previous crew’s nail if appropriate using the rules below (under DIAMETER AT BREAST HEIGHT). Reset the old nail enough so that as much of the old nail is exposed as possible. If the old nail cannot be pulled out to meet this requirement, set a new nail at the same location. If the previous location is no longer accessible (ie.

75

Annual Inventory 2004

VII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA covered in a landslide), there is an abnormality at the previous DIAMETER measurement point, or it is more than 12 inches away from where the diameter should be measured according to current protocols

(either because protocols have changed or the previous crew made a mistake) move the point of measurement and assign a DIAMETER CHECK code of 2. If the old nail marks a point of diameter measurement not used at the current inventory, remove it if possible; otherwise pound it in flush with the tree. NOTE: If the previous nail falls within the range of tolerance outlined above, do not pull it out of the tree just because it is not facing the subplot center. Keep original placement of nails at all times unless there is obvious error (see tolerances above), place a new nail at the old if it cannot be pulled out and is in danger of being completely swallowed before the next re-visit (10 yrs). trees 3.0 in. d.b.h., or snags ≥ 5.0 in. d.b.h., tallied for the first time:

Set an aluminum nail at the point of diameter measurement. On level ground, place the nail on the side of the tree facing the subplot/microplot center. On a steep slope, place the nail on the uphill side of the bole.

Leave as much of the nail exposed as possible, but be sure it is firmly affixed to the tree. Use caution to avoid damaging trees with nails (i.e. hitting bole with axe while hammering) . Do not nail trees less than 3.0 inches in diameter.

When Collected: All live tally trees > 1.0 in d.b.h., all standing dead tally trees > 5.0 in d.b.h.

, when AK subplot witness flag = * (asterisk), when

PRESENT TREE STATUS = 9

Field width: 4 digits (xxx.y)

Tolerance: Live trees, and dead trees with Decay Class 1, 2 : +/- 0.1 in. per 20.0 in increment of measured diameter. A tree with a diameter of 41.0 in would have a tolerance of +/ 0.3

in .

Dead trees with Decay Class 3, 4, 5: +/- 1.0 in. per 20.0 in increment of measured diameter.

MQO: At least 95% of the time

Values: 001.0 to 999.9

DIAMETER AT BREAST HEIGHT (DBH)

Unless one of the following special situations is encountered, measure DBH at 4.5 ft above the ground line on the uphill side of the tree. Round each measurement down to the last 0.1 inch. For example, a reading of 3.68 inches is recorded as 3.6 inches.

Special DBH situations:

1. Forked stem and must branch out from the main stem at an angle of 45 degrees or less. Forks originate at the point on the bole where the piths intersect. Forked trees are handled differently depending on whether the fork originates below 1.0 foot, between 1.0 and 4.5 feet, or above 4.5 feet.

• Trees forked below 1.0 foot. Trees forked in this region are treated as distinctly separate trees. Distances and azimuths are measured individually to the center of each stem where it splits from the stump.

DBH is measured for each stem at 4.5 feet above the ground. When stems originate from pith intersections below 1 foot, it is possible for some stems to be within the limiting distance of the microplot or subplot, and others to be beyond the limiting distance. If stems originating from forks that occur below 1.0 foot fork again between 1.0 and 4.5 feet, the rules in the next paragraph apply.

• Trees forked between 1.0 foot and 4.5 feet. Trees forked in this region are also counted as separate trees, but only one distance and azimuth (to the central stump) is used for all. Although a single azimuth and distance applies to all, multiple stems should be recorded as they occur in clockwise order (from front to back when one stem is directly in front of another). The DBH of each fork is measured at a point 3.5 feet above the pith intersection.

When forks originate from pith intersections between 1.0 and 4.5 feet, the limiting distance is the same for all forks--they are either all on, or all off the plot.

76

Annual Inventory 2004

VII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

Multiple forks are possible if they all originate from approximately the same point on the main stem. In such cases, measure DBH on all stems at 3.5 feet above the common pith intersection.

Once a stem is tallied as a fork that originated from a pith intersection between 1.0 and 4.5 feet, do not recognize any additional forks that may occur on that stem. Measure the diameter of such stems below the base of stem separation (i.e., do not move the point of diameter the entire 3.5 feet above the first fork).

• Trees forked at or above 4.5 feet. Trees forked in this region count as one single tree. If a fork occurs at or immediately above 4.5 feet, measure diameter below the fork just beneath any swelling that would inflate DBH.

Diamter

Point

4.5’

Pith intersection

Sprouts. Stump sprouts originate between ground level and 4.5 feet on the boles of trees that have died or been cut. Stump sprouts are handled the same as forked trees, with the exception that stump sprouts are not required to be 1/3 the diameter of the dead bole. Stump sprouts originating below 1.0 foot are measured at 4.5 feet from ground line. Stump sprouts originating between 1.0 foot and 4.5 feet are measured at 3.5 foot above their point of occurrence. As with forks, rules for measuring distance and azimuth depend on whether the sprouts originate above or below 1.0 foot.

3. Tree with butt-swell or bottleneck: Measure these trees 1.5 feet above the end of the swell or bottleneck if the swell or bottleneck extends 3.0 feet or more above the ground.

1.5’

Diameter point

3.0’ or more

4. Tree with irregularities at DBH: On trees with swellings, bumps, depressions, and branches at DBH, diameter will be measured immediately above the irregularity at the place it ceases to affect normal stem form.

4.5’

Diameter point

4.5’

Diameter point

77

Annual Inventory 2004

VII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

5. Tree on slope: Measure diameter at 4.5 feet from the ground along the bole on the uphill side of the tree.

4.5’ tree: Measure diameter at 4.5 feet from the ground along the bole. The 4.5 foot distance is measured along the underside face of the bole.

4.5’

7. Turpentine above the ground and multiply by 1.1 to estimate DBH outside bark.

8. Independent trees that grow together: If two or more independent stems have grown together at or above the point of DBH, continue to treat them as separate trees. Estimate the diameter of each, set the “DIAMETER

CHECK” code to 1, and explain the situation in the notes.

9. Missing wood or bark. Do not reconstruct the DBH of a tree that is missing wood or bark or at the point of measurement. Record the diameter, to the nearest 0.1 inch, of the wood and bark that is still attached to the tree. If a tree has a localized abnormality (gouge, depression, etc.) at the point of point of DBH, apply the procedure described for trees with irregularities at DBH.

10. Live windthrown tree: Measure from the top of the root collar along the length to 4.5 feet.

Root

Collar

4.5’

78

Annual Inventory 2004

VII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

11. Down live tree with tree-form branches growing vertical from main bole. When a down live tree, touching the ground, has vertical (less than 45 degrees from vertical) tree-like branches coming off the main bole, first determine whether or not the pith of the main bole (averaged along the first log of the tree) is above or below the duff layer.

Duff consists of decomposing leaves and other organic material. You should see no recognizable plant parts, the duff layer is usually dark decomposed organic matter. When moss is present, the top of the duff layer is just below the green portion of the moss. The bottom of this layer is the point where mineral soil (A horizon) begins.

• If the pith of the main bole is above the duff layer, use the same forking rules specified for a forked tree, and take all measurements accordingly (figure below).

• If the pith intersection of the main down bole and vertical tree-like branch occurs below 4.5feet from the stump along the main bole, treat that branch as a separate tree, and measure DBH 3.5 ‘ above the pith intersection for both the main bole and the tree-like branch (figure below).

Down tree above duff

• If the intersection between the main down bole and the tree-like branch occurs beyond the 4.5foot point from the stump along the main bole, treat that branch as part of the main down bole (figure above).

• If the pith of main tree bole is below the duff layer, ignore the main bole, and treat each tree-like branch as a separate tree; take DBH and length measurements from the ground, not necessarily from the top of the down bole (figure below). However, if the top of the main tree bole curves out of the ground towards a vertical angle, treat that portion of that top as an individual tree originating where the pith leaves the duff layer.

Down tree below duff

12. Tree with curved bole (pistol butt tree): Measure along the bole on the uphill side (upper surface) of the tree.

79

Annual Inventory 2004

VII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

13. Diameter on stump (for witness): Use a logger's tape, cloth tape or ruler to measure the longest and shortest axis across the top of the stump. Record diameter as the average of the two measurements.

Item 18--DIAMETER CHECK (c)

Record this code to identify any irregularities in diameter measurement positions (i.e. abnormal swellings, diseases, damage, new measurement positions, etc.) that may affect use of this tree in diameter growth/change analyses.

If diameter at the current inventory is measured at a different location than at the previous inventory (due to one of the reasons shown under Item 16--DIAMETER above), record DIAMETER CHECK=2 and remove the dnail(s) from the previous inventory. If the previous point of diameter measurement can not be found on a live tree (ie. nail fell out) also record code 2. If diameter is BOTH estimated and moved, then use code 2.

When Collected: All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 in d.b.h. and standing dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 in d.b.h.

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of time

Values:

Code Diameter check

0 Diameter measured accurately

1 Diameter estimated

2 Diameter measured at different location than previous measurement

(remove original d-nail)

Item 19--AK 10-YR INCREMENT (Inc)

A 3-digit code recording bored radial increment inside the bark to the nearest 1/20 th

inch for a 10-year period.

10-YR INC is recorded for the first live growing stock tree in each 2-inch dbh class (ex. 6-inch class = 5.0” –

6.9”) and species combination on new plots and for all new trees on remeasurement plots. To see a chart tracking trees still needed by size class do the following: push ctrl + Z, in the Utility menu select the “Tree

DBH/Species Report”.

To obtain radial increment:

• Bore the tree just below the point of diameter measurement (to avoid impacting the diameter measurement) on the same side of the tree facing the point. If tree is on a steep slope, bore for age on the uphill side.

• Count back 10 growth rings from the cambium end of the core starting from the first fully-formed ring

(and skipping this year’s summer growth)(see figure below).

• Measure the length of this segment of the core to the nearest 1/20th of an inch to get radial increment.

Enter this radial increment as the number of twentieths. E.g. 18/20 is recorded as “18” and 27/20 is recorded “27”.

80

Annual Inventory 2004

VII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

The cambium is often pinkish in color with a squishy, moist, corklike texture.

The current year’s unfinished growth is usually very light colored.

When collected: Live tally trees ≥ 5 inches dbh, on all new plots (SAMPLE KIND = 1 or 3, PRESENT TREE

STATUS = 1); live tally trees ≥ 5 inches dbh, on previously measured plots, that were missed, or are ingrowth, ongrowth, or through-growth (trees on plots where SAMPLE KIND = 2, PRESENT TREE STATUS = 1 and

RECONCILE = 1, 2, or 3.)

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: +/- 1/20 per 1 inch of increment

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values: 1 to 999

Item 20--ACTUAL LENGTH (alE)

For trees with missing tops (top on live trees is completely detached; top on dead trees is greater than 50 percent detached from the tree). Record the ACTUAL LENGTH of the tree to the nearest 1.0 foot from ground level to the break. Use the length to the break for ACTUAL LENGTH until a new leader qualifies as the new top for TOTAL LENGTH; until that occurs, continue to record ACTUAL LENGTH to the break. Trees with previously broken tops are considered recovered (i.e., ACTUAL LENGTH = TOTAL LENGTH) when a new leader is 1/3 the diameter of the broken top at the point where the top was broken (not where the new leader originates from the trunk).

ACTUAL LENGTH is the length of the bole, not the vertical height and should only differ from TOTAL LENGTH if the tree has a broken or missing top.

When Collected: All live and standing dead tally trees ≥ 1.0 in DBH

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: +/- 10% of true length

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values: 005 to 400

Item 21--AK LENGTH METHOD

Record the code that indicates the method used to determine tree lengths. This code is activated by hitting the

“v” key while the cursor is on the ACTUAL LENGTH field.

When Collected: All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 in. d.b.h., and all standing dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 in d.b.h.

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of time

Values:

Data

Recorder

Code

Length Method

B

A

N

Actual and total lengths are field measured with a measurement instrument

(e.g., laser, clinometer, relascope)

Actual length is measured with an instrument, total length is visually estimated

Actual and total and lengths are visually estimated (not measured) .

81

Annual Inventory 2004

VII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

Item 22--TOTAL LENGTH (tLe)

Record the TOTAL LENGTH of the tree, to the nearest 1.0 ft from ground level to the top of the tree. For trees growing on a slope, measure on the uphill side of the tree. If the tree has a missing top (top is broken and completely detached from the tree), estimate what the total length would be if there were no missing top. Dead, crooked, or forked tops do not affect TOTAL LENGTH .

When Collected: All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 in. d.b.h. and, all standing dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 in. d.b.h.

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: +/- 10% of true length

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values: 005 to 400

Item 23--COMPACTED CROWN RATIO (cR)

Record the COMPACTED CROWN RATIO for each live tally tree, 1.0 in and larger to the nearest 1 percent.

COMPACTED CROWN RATIO is that portion of the tree supporting live foliage (or in the case of extreme temporary defolialtion, should be supporting live foliage) and is expressed as a percentage of the ACTUAL

TREE LENGTH (ie. include dead tops, but not missing tops in the ratio) . To determine COMPACTED CROWN

RATIO, ocularly transfer lower live branches to fill in large holes in the upper portion of the tree until a full, even crown is visualized.

Try to picture the normal density of photosynthetic foliage and adjust for it (i.e. some branches may be very sparse with needles/leaves).

Do not over-compact trees beyond their typical full crown situation. For example, if tree branches tend to average 2-feet between whorls, do not compact crowns any tighter than the 2-foot spacing Include epicormic branches once they are 1” diameter.

NOTE: This variable is distinctly different from Crown Ratios obtained in the previous (periodic) inventory.

Study the methodology carefully and take a look at the figures below so as to understand the differences.

Crown ratio is based on the ratio of foliage, not where the limbs attach to the tree bole. Crown ratio is an indicator of a tree's vigor. In data analysis, trees with a crown ratio of 30 percent or less are considered less vigorous. For this reason, be particularly careful when deciding between codes greater or less than "30." It is preferable to use a laser or clinometer to measure live crown ratios on these trees. See figure below to get an idea of what is required to get from an uncompacted crown to a COMPACTED CROWN RATIO.

When Collected: All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 in. d.b.h.

Field width: 2 digits

Tolerance: +/- 10% (10% of 100)

MQO: At least 80% of the time

Values: 00 to 99

Compacted Crown Ratio Examples

82

Annual Inventory 2004

VII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

Item 24--CROWN CLASS (c)

Rate tree crowns in relation to the sunlight received and proximity to neighboring trees. Base the assessment on the position of the crown at the time of observation. Example: a formerly overtopped tree which is now dominant due to tree removal is classified as dominant.

Crown classifications are easily applied in even-aged stands. Classifications are more difficult to assign in uneven-aged stands or in plots where more than one age class is present. In these situations, classify the tree based on its immediate environment. In other words, base your classification on how much light the tree's crown is receiving, not its position in the canopy. This data item is used to predict tree growth. The intermediate and overtopped crown classes are meant to include trees seriously affected by direct competition with adjacent trees.

When Collected: All live tally trees > 1.0 in d.b.h.

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 85% of the time

Values:

Code Crown class Definition

1

2

3

4

5

Open grown

Dominant

Codominant

Intermediate

Overtopped

Trees with crowns that receive full light from above and from all sides throughout most of its life, particularly during its early developmental period.

Trees with crown extending above the general level of the crown canopy and receiving full light from above and partly from the sides. These trees are taller than the average trees in the stand and their crowns are well developed, but they could be somewhat crowded on the sides.

Also, trees whose crowns have received full light from above and from all sides during early development and most of their life. Their crown form or shape appears to be free of influence from neighboring trees.

Trees with crowns at the general level of the crown canopy. Crowns receive full light from above but little direct sunlight penetrates their sides. Usually they have medium-sized crowns and are somewhat crowded from the sides.

In stagnated stands, codominant trees have small-sized crowns and are crowded on the sides.

These trees are shorter than dominants and codominants, but their crowns extend into the canopy of codominant and dominant trees. They receive little direct light from above and none from the sides. As a result, intermediate trees usually have small crowns and are very crowded from the sides.

Trees with crowns entirely below the general level of the crown canopy that receive no direct sunlight either from above or the sides

Item 25--ROTTEN/MISSING CULL (c)

Record the percent rotten or missing cubic-foot cull for all live tally trees ≥ 5.0 inches DBH and all standing dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 inches DBH.

Record the percentage of rotten and missing cubic-foot volume, to the nearest 1 percent. When estimating volume loss (tree cull), only consider the cull on the merchantable bole/portion of the tree, from a 1-foot stump to a 4-inch top. Do not include any cull estimate above ACTUAL LENGTH.

Rotten and missing volume loss is often difficult to estimate. Refer to supplemental disease and insect pests field guides and local defect guidelines as an aid in identifying damaging agents and their impact on volume loss. Use your best judgment and be alert to such defect indicators as the following:

• Cankers or fruiting bodies.

Swollen or punky knots.

Dull, hollow sound of bole (use regional standards).

Large dead limbs, especially those with frayed ends.

Sawdust around the base of the tree.

Use insect/disease laminated flash cards as a guide for determining the extent of rotten cull in the afflicted tree.

83

Annual Inventory 2004

VII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

There is also a cubic-foot volume table included in Appendix 6 (page 169) as an aid in estimating rotten/missing cull. Do not include evidence of rot which is obtained solely by coring the tree.

When Collected: All live and standing dead tally trees > 5.0 in. d.b.h.

Field width: 2 digits

Tolerance: +/- 10%

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values: 0 to 99

Item 26--AK tree class (Z)

Record the tree class code that best describes the general quality of the tree. For dead and sound dead trees, tree class is that of the tree at the time of current measurement. Tree class codes 3 and 4 require substantial amounts of either rough or rotten cull be present in the tree.

When collected: All trees ≥ 5.0 inches d.b.h.

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 70% of the time

Values:

Code Description

2 Growing stock : All trees of commercial that meet merchantability standards. Excludes rough or rotten cull trees.

3 Rough cull : Trees that do not now, or prospectively, have at least one solid 8 foot section, reasonably free of form defect, on the merchantable bole OR have 75% or more of the merchantable volume cull: and more than half of this cull is due to sound dead wood cubic-foot loss or severe form defect volume loss.

4 Rotten cull : Trees with 75 % or more of the merchantable volume cull, and more than half of this cull is due to rotten or missing cubic-foot volume loss.

Item 27--DECAY CLASS (d)

Record for each standing dead tree, 5.0-inch in diameter and larger, indicating the trees stage of decay.

It is unlikely that decay class 5 will apply to a tally tree; by the time a dead tree has reached decay class 5, it will likely have toppled over or have become too short to qualify for tally.

When Collected: All standing dead tally trees > 5.0 in d.b.h.

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: +/- 1 class

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values: Use the following table for guidelines:

Snag characteristics

1

Decay

Class

(code)

Limbs and

Branches

Top % Bark

Remaining

Sapwood

Presence

Sapwood

Condition

Heartwood Condition

1 All present Pointed 100 Intact

Sound, incipient decay, hard, original color

Sound, hard, original color

2

Few limbs, no fine branches

Broken Variable Sloughing

Advanced decay, fibrous, firm to soft, light brown

Sound at base, incipient decay in outer edge of upper bole, hard, light to reddish brown

84

Annual Inventory 2004

VII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

3

4

Limb stubs Broken

Few or no stubs

Broken

Variable

Variable

Sloughing

Sloughing

Fibrous, soft, light to reddish brown

Cubical, soft, reddish to dark brown

Incipient decay at base, advanced decay throughout upper bole, fibrous, hard to firm, reddish brown

Advanced decay at base, sloughing from upper bole, fibrous to cubical, soft, dark reddish brown

5 None Broken

Less than

20

Gone Gone

Sloughing, cubical, soft, dark brown, OR fibrous, very soft, dark reddish brown, encased in hardened shell

1

Characteristics are for Douglas-fir. Snags for other species may vary somewhat; use this table as a guide.

Item 28--AK MORTALITY YEAR

Record the estimated year that tree died or was cut. For each tree that has died or been cut, record the 4-digit year in which the tree died. Mortality year is also recorded for trees on land that has been converted to a nonforest land use, if it can be determined that a tree died before the land was converted.

When Collected: Plots where SAMPLE KIND = 1 or 2: all PREVIOUS TREE STATUS = 1 and PRESENT

TREE STATUS = 2 or 3; or PRESENT TREE STATUS = 2 and RECONCILE = 1, 2, or 3.

Field width: 4 digits

Tolerance: +/- 1 year for remeasurement cycles of 5 years

+/- 2 years for remeasurement cycles of > 5 years

MQO: At least 70% of the time

Values: 1995 or higher

Item 29--AK CAUSE OF DEATH (cd)

Record a cause of death for all trees that have died or been cut since the previous survey. If on a plot for first time (SAMPLE KIND = 1), then estimate the cause of death. If cause of death cannot be reliably estimated

(usually within the last 5 years), record unknown/not sure.

When Collected: When any PRESENT TREE STATUS = 2 or 3

Field width: 2 digits

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 80% of the time

Values:

85

Annual Inventory 2004

VII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA

10 Insect

20 Disease

30 Fire

40 Animal

50 Weather

60 Vegetation (suppression, competition, vines/kudzu)

70

Unknown/not sure/other- includes death from human activity not related to silvicultural or landclearing activity (accidental, random,

80 etc.) Tree notes required.

Silvicultural or landclearing activity (death caused by harvesting or other silvicultural activity, including girdling, chaining, etc., or to landclearing activity)

-TREE NOTES MENU-

TREE NOTES are available for each individual tree record and are accessible by pushing the F4 key while the cursor is anywhere on the current tree record.

Item 30--TREE NOTES

Record notes pertaining to an individual tree as called for to explain or describe another variable.

Accessible in the F4 menu (regardless of PRESENT TREE STATUS).

When collected: All trees.

Field width: 40

Tolerance: N/A

MQO: N/A

Values: English language words, phrases and numbers

86

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter VIII SITE TREE INFORMATION

VIII. SITE TREE INFORMATION

General instructions

Site trees are a measure of site productivity expressed by the height to age relationship of dominant and codominant trees. If suitable site trees are available, site tree data are required for every accessible forest land condition class defined on a plot. An individual site tree may be used for more than one condition class where differences in condition classes are not the result of differences in site productivity. For example, when different condition classes are caused solely due to differences in RESERVED STATUS, OWNER CLASS, and/or disturbance-related differences in DENSITY (e.g., heavily thinned vs. unthinned), a site tree may be used for more than one condition class. When in doubt, do not use a site tree for more than one condition class.

Selection criteria

Select at least three site trees for the tree species that defines the forest type for each accessible forest land condition class . Select trees off the subplot where possible.

Use only trees that have remained in a dominant or codominant crown position throughout their entire life span. If possible, trees should be 5.0 inches in diameter, or larger, and at least 20 years old. Ideally, site trees in the western U.S. should be between 35-80 years old. If preferred trees cannot be found in the age range, expand the age range to 15-250 years.

Try to reject trees that are visibly damaged, trees with ring patterns that exhibit signs of stature suppression , trees with abnormalities at DBH, and trees with rotten cores.

If there are no site trees that meet the acceptable criteria above, then select trees that match the definitions as closely as possible. This can include less desirable trees such as trees greater than 250 years old, dead, wolf, or site suppressed trees. Record the appropriate “AK questionable site/age tree” flag for those site trees not meeting the selection criteria.

Alaska Remeasurement Plots: if the forest type has changed from the initial visit, collect additional site trees as needed so that, including previously measured site trees, three site trees have been collected for each forest type species. Previous site trees will be downloaded into the data recorder, plus they will be printed on data sheets included in the plot folder.

Site trees should be selected in the following order of preference:

1st Choice: representative of the stand, on the list below.

2nd Choice: not representative of the stand, any suitable tree on the list below

Note: in Alaska “representative of the stand” means a species that defines the forest type.

When Collected: New plots: all accessible forest conditions on new plots

Remeasurement OR

Site trees from initial visit do not meet selection criteria and acceptable site trees can be found

Region

-------------------- Alaska Softwood Species --------------------

011

019

094

Pacific silver fir subalpine fir white spruce spruce

PNW

RMRS, PNW

RMRS, PNW

PNW

098

108

Sitka spruce lodgepole pine yew

242 western

PNW

RMRS, PNW redcedar

PNW

PNW

263

264 western hemlock mountain hemlock

RMRS, PNW

RMRS, PNW

87

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter VIII SITE TREE INFORMATION

-------------------- Alaska Hardwood Species --------------------

351

375

746 red alder paper birch quaking aspen

PNW

RMRS, PNW

RMRS, PNW

747

Alaska age tree selection black cottonwood RMRS, PNW

Select the age trees based on the Selection criteria for site trees (above) as well as the following:

Select three live age trees per accessible forested condition. Each tree should represent plurality (majority) of the predominant STAND SIZE CLASS of the condition. In uneven aged stands, use the tree age that represents plurality of tree composition in the stand.

Age trees are used to compute stand age for any sampled accessible forest land conditions.

Alaska Remeasurement Plots: if the forest type has changed from the initial visit, collect additional age trees as needed so that, including previously measured age trees, a total of three age trees exist for each accessible forest condition.

D. Site tree data variables

For each site/age tree, record the following items:

Item 1--AK site/age tree number (No)

Automatically records a code indicating the assigned number for each site/age tree record on a plot. Numbers will be pre-assigned to downloaded/printed site trees. The data recorder will automatically assign a number to each new site/age tree (in sequential order).

When collected: Previous visit site/age trees downloaded , new site/age trees number entered automatically in sequential order.

Field width: 2

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: 100% of the time

Values: 00 - 99

Item 2--SUBPLOT NUMBER (Sb)

Record the subplot number to which the site /age tree is referenced. Record a 1 digit code indicating the number of the subplot on which a site /age tree is on or near. Subplot numbers for site /age trees previously collected will be downloaded/printed if on file.

When Collected: All site /age trees

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values:

Code Description

1 Center subplot

2 North subplot

3 Southeast subplot

4 Southwest subplot

Item 3--AK site/age tree status

This variable is used to determine if this site/age tree is old “O” or new “N”. If the site/age has been downloaded from the previous visit, then an “O” will be displayed next to the subplot number. If the site/age is new “N” then it has been copied from a tree record or entered manually (as a non-tally site tree). This variable will not be highlighted by the cursor, and will be automatically filled in by the software.

88

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter VIII SITE TREE INFORMATION

When collected: downloaded tree records will automatically get status of “O”. New tree records will get status of “N”.

Field width: 1

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values: N = new (copied from current tree tally or entered manually as non-tally tree)

O = old (downloaded from previous plot visit)

Item 4--AK site/age tree type

Record the appropriate type of site, age, or combination that this tree record represents.

When collected: All site/age trees

Field width: 1

Tolerance: no errors

MQO: at least 95% of the time

Values:

Code Definition

1 Site tree

2 Age tree

3 Site and age tree

Item 5--AK questionable site/age tree flag

Record the appropriate code to identify whether the current site/age tree meets (or does not meet) the selection criteria as outlined above.

Reamesurement Note: If AK Site tree status = “O” (old) then any site/age trees that also have a downloaded

“AK questionable site/age tree flag” of S, A, or B will need to be replaced with a new site/age that meets the selection criteria outlined above.

When collected: All site/age trees

Field width: 1

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 70% of the time

Values:

Code Description

C

S

A

B selection criteria met

Site tree does not meet selection criteria

Age tree does not meet selection criteria

Both site & age trees do not meet selection criteria

Item 6--CONDITION CLASS LIST (C)

List all CONDITION CLASSES that the site index data from this tree represent.

List all CONDITION CLASSES associated with this tree record, regardless of type (i.e. whether it is site, age, or both) and regardless of whether it is a new “N” or old “O” tree record.

When Collected: All site /age trees

Field width: 5 digits

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values: 1 to 56789

Item 7--AK TREE RECORD NUMBER (Trn)

This number is only recorded when the site/age tree is copied from a tally tree record or it is a downloaded “old” site/age tally tree (form the previous visit). Not editable

89

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter VIII SITE TREE INFORMATION

When collected: downloaded site/age tally trees and trees copied from a tally tree record.

Field width: 3

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values: 001-999

Item 8--AZIMUTH (Azm)

Record the AZIMUTH from the subplot center; sight the center of the base of each tree with a compass.

Record AZIMUTH to the nearest degree. Use 360 for north.

Record an azimuth for new site/age trees. Record the azimuth even if the site/age tree is not within 24.0 feet of a subplot center.

When Collected: All site /age trees

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: +/- 10 degrees

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values: 001 to 360

Item 9--HORIZONTAL DISTANCE (Hdst)

Record the measured HORIZONTAL DISTANCE, to the nearest 0.1 ft, from the subplot center to the pith of the tree at the base.

When Collected: All site /age trees

Field width: 4 digits (xxx.y)

Tolerance: +/- 5 ft

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values: 000.1 to 200.0

Item 10--SPECIES (Spc)

Species is downloaded for site/age trees previously collected. Record for new site/age trees.

When Collected: All site /age trees

Values:

CODE SPECIES

011

019

042

094

095

098

108

231

Pacific silver fir subalpine fir

Alaska yellow-cedar 264 white spruce black spruce sitka spruce lodegepole pine

Pacific yew

CODE

242

263

351

375

746

747

SPECIES western redcedar western hemlock mountain hemlock red alder paper birch quaking aspen black cottonwood

Item 11--DIAMETER (Dbh)

Use the same procedures and tolerances described on page 75 .

Diameter is downloaded for site/age trees previously collected. Record for new site/age trees.

When Collected: All site /age trees

Item 12--SITE TREE LENGTH (Ht)

With a clinometer or other approved instrument, measure the total length of the site tree from the ground to the top of the tree. Record to the nearest 1.0 foot. SITE TREE LENGTH must be measured; no estimates are permitted on site trees.

Downloaded for site/age trees previously collected.

90

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter VIII SITE TREE INFORMATION

When Collected: All site /age trees

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: +/- 10% of true length

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values: 005 to 999

Item 13--TREE AGE AT DIAMETER (Age)

Record the tree age as determined by an increment sample. Bore the tree just below the point of diameter measurement (d.b.h.) with an increment borer. Count the rings between the outside edge of the core and the pith. Do not add years to get total age.

Downloaded for site/age trees previously collected.

When Collected: All site /age trees

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: +/- 5 years

MQO: At least 95% of the time

Values: 001 to 999

Determining breast-height age of large trees: To determine the age of a tree whose radius is greater than the length of the increment borer, use the following procedure.

To access the extrapolated age utility on the field data recorder: push Ctrl + Z while the Age field is highlighted, enter in all the data required (see steps below and use F1 help screens as needed). When finished, the extrapolated age should be entered into the Age field. Make sure that AK age determination method (next variable) gets a code of 2, showing age is extrapolated.

1. Bore into the tree as far as possible, extract the core, and count the rings.

2. Count the number of rings in the inner 2 inches of the core.

3. Measure the total length of the extracted core to the nearest 0.1 inch. (include the entire thickness of bark, even though some of it may not be in the core because it crumbled or the tree was cored in a bark furrow)

4. Divide the tree's diameter by 2.

5. Subtract (3) from (4). This gives you the distance by which you are short of reaching tree center.

6. Divide this number (5) by 2. This tells you how many 2-inch lengths you were short by.

7. Multiply this number (6) by the number of rings in inner 2 inches (2).

8. Add this number (7) to the total number of rings in the extracted core (1). This is the tree's estimated breast-high age. that (next variable) gets a code of 2, showing age is extrapolated.

Example: Determine the age of a 59.6-inch Douglas-fir. The core has 110 rings, and has 10 rings in the inner

2 inches. 0.8 in. of the 16.4-inch-long increment borer did not penetrate the tree. Each number below is associated with its corresponding step above:

Step 1: 110 rings counted

Step 2: 10 rings in the inner 2 in. of the core

Step 3: 14.6 in. of core was extracted + 1 in of bark that was not in the core = 15.6

Step 4: 59.6 in. is the tree’s diameter and you then divide by 2 = 29.8

in. to center of tree (pith)

Step 5: 29.8 in. (true center) – 15.6 in. (measured core) = 14.2

in. short of reaching the pith

Step 6: 14.2 in./ 2 = 7.1 (2 in.) lengths short

Step 7: 7.1 (from step6) x 10 (from step 2) = 71 rings not counted

Step 8: 110 rings counted (step 1) + 71 rings not counted (step 7) = 181 years old at BH

Step 9: for Item 14 use code 2 (bored and extrapolated age)

After boring a tree for age, leave the extracted increment core at the base of the tree (for the convenience of the QA crew).

91

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter VIII SITE TREE INFORMATION

Item 14--AK age determination method

Record the code that best describes how the age was determined in the field.

When collected: All site/age trees

Field width: 1

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: 99% of the time

Values: 1 = bored age, 2 = bored and extrapolated (core bit cannot reach the center of the tree)

Item 15--SITE TREE NOTES

Record notes pertaining to an individual site tree.

Record notes to clarify or describe a situation in the individual site tree record (line) by pushing the F4 key.

When collected: All site trees as necessary

Field width: 40

Tolerance: N/A

MQO: N/A

Values: Single words and abbreviated sentances

92

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter IX CROWNS: MEASUREMENTS AND SAMPLING

IX. CROWNS: MEASUREMENTS AND SAMPLING

NOTE:

This chapter is for P3 plots only, a select few of the many plots being installed this season

(approx 5%) will make use of the variables contained within. To ascertain the P2/P3 status of the plot look at the plot folder, if there is a P3 printed, then P3 as well as P2 data will be collected. The crowns measurements will be collected in the Tree and Sapling screen, and each variable will be collected on P2 installed trees and saplings (accessible by pushing the F4 key while in the tree record screen).

Section 12

12.1

OVERVIEW 94

12.2

CROWN DEFINITIONS 94

12.3

CROWN DENSITY-FOLIAGE TRANSPARENCY CARD 96

12.4

CROWN RATING PRECAUTIONS 97

12.5

UNCOMPACTED LIVE CROWN RATIO 98

12.6

CROWN LIGHT EXPOSURE 101

12.7

CROWN POSITION 102

12.8

CROWN VIGOR CLASS 104

12.9

CROWN DENSITY 105

12.10 CROWN DIEBACK 106

12.11 FOLIAGE TRANSPARENCY 109

12.12

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS 110

93

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter IX CROWNS: MEASUREMENTS AND SAMPLING

12.1 OVERVIEW

Crown indicators are designed to be used together. Each indicator comprises a piece of information that can be used individually or as a factor in combination with other indicators. Each variable, alone or in combination with others, adds to the overall rating given each tree. It is important to realize that models are designed to rate trees on how they look, from thriving to almost dead and to help predict future conditions of trees and forest ecosystems.

VIGOR CLASS, UNCOMPACTED LIVE CROWN RATIO, CROWN LIGHT EXPOSURE and CROWN POSITION are determined for each sapling. Foliage below the point used for UNCOMPACTED LIVE CROWN RATIO is not considered in VIGOR CLASS determination. All sapling measurements are done during plot establishment and whenever plot remeasurement occurs.

Crown evaluations, including UNCOMPACTED LIVE CROWN RATIO, LIGHT EXPOSURE, POSITION, DENSITY,

DIEBACK, and TRANSPARENCY are made on all trees with DBH 5.0 inches or larger. Trees with high scores for

UNCOMPACTED LIVE CROWN RATIO and DENSITY, and low scores for DIEBACK and FOLIAGE

TRANSPARENCY have increased potential for carbon fixation, nutrient storage and increased potential for survival and reproduction. Crown evaluations allow for the quantitative assessment of current tree conditions and provide an integrated measure of site conditions, stand density and influence of external stresses. All crown measurements are taken during plot establishment and whenever plot remeasurement occurs.

Two persons make all crown measurements. Individuals should be ½ to 1 tree length from the base of the tree to obtain a good view of the crown. Move away from each other at least 10 feet to take these measurements. A position of 90 degrees to each other from the tree base is ideal (Figure 12.3). When estimates made by two individuals disagree, they should discuss the reasons for their ratings until an agreement is reached, or use the methods below to resolve the situation.

If the numbers for a crown measurement estimated by two crew members do not match, arrive at the final value by:

(1) taking an average, if the numbers differ by 10 percent (2 classes) or less; (2) changing positions, if the numbers differ by 15 percent or more and attempting to narrow the range to 10 percent or less if crew members cannot agree; or (3) averaging the two estimates for those trees that actually have different ratings from the two viewing areas (ratings of 30 and 70 would be recorded as 50).

Crown Shape

Crown shape is the silhouette of a tree, drawn from branch tip to branch tip, which contains all of a tree’s foliage as it grows in a stand. Exclude abnormally long branches beyond the edge of the crown for this silhouette. Normally, silhouettes are derived from vigorous, open grown trees and tend to be species-specific. For Phase 3 purposes, silhouettes vary with age and spacing. Tree crowns tend to flatten out with age and be more slender when growing in crowded conditions. Crown shape is important when measuring CROWN DENSITY and is used to estimate crown biomass. Crown shape is used as an outline for the sides of the tree.

Crown Top

The crown top is the highest point of a standing tree. Young trees usually have more conical-shaped crowns and the main terminal is the top. Older trees and many hardwoods have globose and flat-topped crowns, where a lateral branch is the highest point. For some measurements the highest live foliage is considered the live crown top. Other measurements include a dead top. Some crown measurements assess how much of the expected crown is present and include broken or missing tops.

Dieback

This is recent mortality of branches with fine twigs, which begins at the terminal portion of a branch and proceeds toward the trunk. Dieback is only considered when it occurs in the upper and outer portions of the tree. When whole branches are dead in the upper crown, without obvious signs of damage such as breaks or animal injury, assume that the branches died from the terminal portion of the branch. Dead branches in the lower portion of the live crown are assumed to have died from competition and shading. Dead branches in the lower live crown are not considered as part of crown dieback, unless there is continuous dieback from the upper and outer crown down to those branches .

94

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter IX CROWNS: MEASUREMENTS AND SAMPLING

Epicormic

Shoot growth, from latent or suppressed buds, that arises from old branches, from the trunk or near large branch wounds or breaks. Epicormics remain epicormics until they regain the size of previous branches for trees with no branches 1.0 inch or larger in diameter at the base above the swelling. For trees that had 1.0 inch or larger branches when the epicormics formed, epicormics become branches once they reach 1.0 inch in diameter.

Live Branch

A live branch is any woody lateral growth supporting foliage, and is 1.0 inch or larger in diameter at the base above the swelling where it joins a main stem or larger branch. Small trees or certain tree species greater than 5.0 inches

DBH may have only live twigs which have not yet reached 1.0 inch or larger at the point of attachment. If the death of larger branches is not the cause of these twigs, the twigs are considered branches for these smaller branched trees until the tree matures to a point where twigs have attained 1.0 inch or larger in diameter at the base above the swelling where it joins a main stem or larger branch.

Live Crown Base

The live crown base is an imaginary horizontal line drawn across the trunk from the bottom of the lowest live foliage of the "obvious live crown" for trees and from the lowest live foliage of the lowest twig for saplings. The "obvious live crown" is described as the point on the tree where most live branches/twigs above that point are continuous and typical for a tree species (and/or tree size) on a particular site. Include most crown branches/twigs, but exclude epicormic twigs/sprigs and straggler branches that usually do not contribute much to the tree's growth. The base of the live branch/twig bearing the lowest foliage may be above or below this line.

For trees 5.0 inches DBH or greater, if any live branch is within 5 feet below this "obvious live crown" line, a new horizontal line is established. Create the new line at the base of live foliage on that branch. Continue this evaluation process until no live branches are found within 5 feet of the foliage of the lowest qualifying branch

(Figure 12-1).

Occasionally, all original major crown branches/twigs are dead or broken and many new twigs/sprigs develop.

These situations are likely to occur in areas of heavy thinning, commercial clearcuts and severe weather damage:

• Trees that had an "obvious live crown" with live branches now have no crown to measure until the new live twigs become live branches. When these new live branches appear, draw the new live crown base to the live foliage of the lowest live branch that now meets the 5-foot rule.

• Saplings and small trees that had only live twigs should establish the crown base at the base of the live foliage on the new lowest live twig. If no live twigs are present, there is no crown to measure.

Figure 12-1. Determining the base of the live crown.

95

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter IX CROWNS: MEASUREMENTS AND SAMPLING

Overstory Canopy Zone

The area delineated by the average live crown height determined from the UNCOMPACTED LIVE CROWN RATIO of overstory trees. The bottom of the overstory canopy zone is the average height of the live crown bases. The top of the zone is the average height for the live crown tops.

Snag Branch

A dead upper crown branch without twigs or sprigs attached to it. A branch that died due to shading in any crown is not a snag branch.

Sprig

Any woody or non-woody lateral growth, without secondary branching, less than 1.0 inch in diameter at the base above the swelling at the point of attachment to a branch or crown stem.

Twig

Any woody lateral growth, with secondary branching, less than 1.0 inch in diameter at the base above the swelling at the point of attachment to a branch or crown stem.

12.3 CROWN DENSITY-FOLIAGE TRANSPARENCY CARD

Front

Back

Figure

The crown density - foliage transparency card (Figure 12-2) should be used as a training aid until crew personnel are comfortable with all ratings. White areas of the card represent skylight visible through the crown area and black areas represent a portion of the tree that is blocking skylight. After training, use the card to calibrate your eyes at the start of each day and rate those trees that do not fit into an obvious class. For CROWN DENSITY, hold the card so that "Crown Density" is right-side up ("Foliage Transparency" should be upside down). Use the numbers that are right-side up. Conversely, for FOLIAGE TRANSPARENCY, make sure that "Foliage Transparency" is right-side up. Crews should refer to specific CROWN DENSITY or FOLIAGE TRANSPARENCY sections for a definition of aspects that are included in the crown rating.

96

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter IX CROWNS: MEASUREMENTS AND SAMPLING

The back of the crown density - foliage transparency card has two uses: for CROWN DENSITY when a portion of the crown is missing and a general scale for estimating UNCOMPACTED LIVE CROWN RATIO. Crews should refer to the CROWN DENSITY and UNCOMPACTED LIVE CROWN RATIO sections for the use of this side of the card.

12.4 CROWN RATING PRECAUTIONS

Crews must be especially careful when making evaluations, and pay special attention to certain factors that may affect measurements in the field. These factors include:

-

Distance and slope from the tree

-

View of the crown

Climatic

Heavy

-

Leaning

Trees with no “crown” by definition

Distance and slope from the tree -

Crews must attempt to stay at least 1/2 to 1 tree length from the tree being evaluated. Some ratings change with proximity to the tree. In some situations, it is impossible to satisfy this step, but the crew should do the best it can in each case. All evaluations are made at grade (same elevation as base of the tree) or up slope from the tree.

This may not be possible in all cases but evaluating trees from the down slope side should be avoided.

View of the crown -

Crew members should evaluate trees when standing at an angle to each other, striving to obtain the best view of the crown. The ideal positions are at 90 degrees to each other on flat terrain (Figure 12-3). If possible, never evaluate the tree from the same position or at 180 degrees. In a thick canopy forest, getting a good perspective of the crown becomes difficult. Overlapping branches, background trees and lack of a good viewing area can cause problems when rating some trees. Crews need to move laterally to search for a good view. Take special care when rating such trees.

Figure 12-3. Crew positions for viewing crowns.

97

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter IX CROWNS: MEASUREMENTS AND SAMPLING

Climatic conditions -

Cloudy or overcast skies, fog, rain and poor sun angles may affect the accuracy of crown estimates. Crews need to be especially careful during poor lighting conditions to obtain the best possible view of the crown for the given climate conditions.

Heavy defoliation -

During heavy defoliation, CROWN DIEBACK may be overestimated and FOLIAGE TRANSPARENCY may be underestimated due to the difficulty in differentiating dead twigs from defoliated twigs. The use of binoculars may help in separating dead twigs from defoliated twigs.

Leaning trees -

Leaning trees cause a major problem in estimating crown variables. Record crown variables as accurately as possible for the tree as it actually occurs rather than as it might appear if standing upright and also record in the

PDR tree note field that it is leaning (Figure 12-5). This will allow for better data interpretation.

Trees with no “crown” by definition (epicormics or sprigs only) -

After a sudden release or damage, a tree may have very dense foliage, but no crown. These situations are coded as follows: UNCOMPACTED LIVE CROWN RATIO = 00, CROWN LIGHT EXPOSURE = 0, CROWN POSITION =

3, CROWN DENSITY = 00, CROWN DIEBACK = 99, FOLIAGE TRANSPARENCY = 99. This combination of codes is a flag for trees with no crowns.

After a sudden release or damage, a sapling may have very dense foliage, but no crown as it only has sprigs.

These situations are coded as follows: UNCOMPACTED LIVE CROWN RATIO = 00, CROWN LIGHT EXPOSURE

= 0, CROWN POSITION = 3, sapling VIGOR = 3. This combination of codes is a flag for saplings with no crowns.

12.5 UNCOMPACTED LIVE CROWN RATIO

UNCOMPACTED LIVE CROWN RATIO is a percentage determined by dividing the live crown height by the total live tree height (Figure 12-5).

Saplings

Determine sapling UNCOMPACTED LIVE CROWN RATIO by dividing the live crown height by total tree height to the live crown top, then enter the appropriate code into the PDR. Live crown height is the distance between the top live foliage (dieback and dead branches are not included) and the lowest live foliage on the lowest live twig for saplings. Be sure to eliminate vine foliage as best you can when determining the live crown. The live crown base for saplings is different from trees 5.0 inches DBH and larger. The 5-foot/1-inch rule does not apply in this case.

Do not include sprigs or leaves on the main stem below the lowest live twig (Figure 12-4).

When the two estimates do not agree, follow the guidelines listed at the end of section 12.1 Overview . The estimate is placed into one of 21 percentage classes.

98

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter IX CROWNS: MEASUREMENTS AND SAMPLING

Figure12-4. Sapling UNCOMPACTED LIVE CROWN RATIO determination examples.

Measure leaning saplings as they are (Figure 12-5).

Figure 12-5. UNCOMPACTED LIVE CROWN RATIO examples.

99

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter IX CROWNS: MEASUREMENTS AND SAMPLING

Trees

Live crown height is the distance from the live crown top (dieback in the upper portion of the crown is not part of the live crown) to the "obvious live crown" base (Figure 12-6). Many times there are additional live branches below the

"obvious live crown". These branches are only included if they have a basal diameter greater than 1.0 inch and are within 5.0 feet of the base of the obvious live crown (Figure 12-1). The live crown base becomes that point on the main bole perpendicular to the lowest live foliage on the last branch that is included in the live crown. The live crown base is determined by the live foliage and not by the point where a branch intersects with the main bole.

Occasionally, small trees or certain species may not have 1.0-inch diameter branches. If this occurs, use the 5.0foot rule, and apply it to branches that you feel contribute significantly to tree growth.

An individual can use the UNCOMPACTED LIVE CROWN RATIO scale on the back of the crown density - foliage transparency card to help estimate ratios (Figure 12-2). Hold the card in one hand, parallel to the trunk of the tree being evaluated and move the card closer or farther from your eye until the 0 is at the live crown top and the 99 is at the base of the tree where it meets the ground. Then place your finger at the live crown base. The number on the scale provides the UNCOMPACTED LIVE CROWN RATIO. Interpolate to the nearest 5 percent if the point is between two values on the scale. A clinometer can also be used to verify the UNCOMPACTED LIVE CROWN

RATIO by determining the values of both heights and determining the ratio of the two values.

When estimates between crew members do not agree, follow the guidelines listed at the end of section 12.1

Overview . The estimate is placed into one of 21 percentage classes.

Figure 12-6. UNCOMPACTED LIVE CROWN RATIO outline and rating examples

When collected: All live trees > 1.0 in DBH

Field width: 2 digits

Tolerance: +/- 10% (2 classes)

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values:

100

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter IX CROWNS: MEASUREMENTS AND SAMPLING

Code

00

Definition

No crown

Code

35

Definition

31-35%

Code

70

Definition

66-70%

05

10

15

20

25

30

1-5%

6-10%

11-15%

16-20%

21-25%

26-30%

40

45

50

55

60

65

36-40%

41-45%

46-50%

51-55%

56-60%

61-65%

75

80

85

90

95

99

71-75%

76-80%

81-85%

86-90%

91-95%

96-100%

Note: Class code is the percentage of the upper limits of the class, i.e., Code 10 is 6% to 10%, etc.

12.6 CROWN LIGHT EXPOSURE

Rate the UNCOMPACTED LIVE CROWN RATIO for each side of the tree separately using the criteria for estimating total UNCOMPACTED LIVE CROWN RATIO. Visually divide the crown vertically into four equal sides.

In order for a side to qualify for tally, the side must have an uncompacted live crown ratio of at least 35 percent.

Additionally for a side to qualify, a continuous portion of live crown 35 percent or more in length must be completely exposed to direct light. For this measurement, a tree cannot shade itself (e.g., leaning trees or umbrella shaped trees). Try to divide the crown in such a way that as many sides as possible receive full light. Count the number of sides that would receive direct light if the sun were directly above the tree. Add one if the tree receives direct light from the top (Figure 12-7).

Figure 12-7. Dividing the crown.

Note: The entire side (25 percent of the crown circumference) must be receiving full light to qualify. A sliver of a side receiving light does not qualify. Trees with all sides having less than a 35 percent UNCOMPACTED LIVE

CROWN RATIO can have a maximum crown exposure of one. Individual sides with less than 35 percent

UNCOMPACTED LIVE CROWN RATIO should not be counted (Figure 12-8).

101

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter IX CROWNS: MEASUREMENTS AND SAMPLING

Figure 12-8. CROWN LIGHT EXPOSURE.

When collected: All live trees > 1.0 in DBH

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: within 1 if > 0

MQO: At least 85% of the time

Values:

Code Definition

0

1

2

3

4

5

The tree receives no full light because it is shaded by trees, vines, or other vegetation; the tree has no crown by definition.

The tree receives full light from the top or 1 side.

The tree receives full light from the top and 1 side (or 2 sides without the top).

The tree receives full light from the top and 2 sides (or 3 sides without the top).

The tree receives full light from the top and 3 sides.

The tree receives full light from the top and 4 sides.

Determine the relative position of each tree in relation to the overstory canopy zone (Figure 12-9). Codes 1-3 should be used in stands where the tree crown cover is closed (>50 percent cover). If the tree crowns are not closed (<50 percent cover) and the area is greater than 1 acre in size, then assign code 4. When code 4 is used, it is assigned to all trees in the stand except trees with no crown by definition. Code 4 is typically used in the following cases:

• Trees and saplings in stands, over 1 acre in size, where crown cover is less than 50 percent.

• Trees and saplings in clumps less than 1 acre in size (i.e., not a condition class) when the overall forest

(the condition class), over 1 acre in size, is a patchwork of open areas and clumps of trees.

Code 1 is not used for saplings.

102

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter IX CROWNS: MEASUREMENTS AND SAMPLING

Figure 12-9. CROWN LIGHT EXPOSURE and CROWN POSITION.

When collected: All live trees > 1.0 in DBH

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 85% of the time

Values:

Code

1

2

3

4

Definition

Superstory. The live crown top must be two times the height of the top of the overstory canopy zone. The tree is open grown because most of the crown is above the overstory canopy zone (pioneers, seed trees, whips, remnants from previous stands, etc.). NOT

USED FOR SAPLINGS.

Overstory. The live crown top is above the middle of the overstory canopy zone.

Understory. The live crown top is at or below the middle of the overstory canopy zone, or tree has no crown by definition.

Open Canopy. An overstory canopy zone is not evident because the tree crowns in this condition are not fully closed (<50% cover). Most of the trees in this stand are not competing with each other for light.

103

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter IX CROWNS: MEASUREMENTS AND SAMPLING

12.8 CROWN VIGOR CLASS

See Figure 12-10 for a visual description of the sapling CROWN VIGOR classes.

Figure 12-10. Sapling CROWN VIGOR classes.

When collected: All live trees > 1.0 in DBH and < 5.0 in DBH

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values:

Class/Code Definition

1 Saplings must have an UNCOMPACTED LIVE CROWN RATIO of 35 or higher, have less than 5 percent DIEBACK (deer/rabbit browse is not considered as dieback but is

2

3 considered missing foliage) and 80 percent or more of the foliage present is normal or at least 50 percent of each leaf is not damaged or missing. Twigs and branches that are dead because of normal shading are not included.

Saplings do not meet Class 1 or 3 criteria. They may have any UNCOMPACTED LIVE

CROWN RATIO, may or may not have DIEBACK and may have between 21 and 100 percent of the foliage classified as normal.

Saplings may have any UNCOMPACTED LIVE CROWN RATIO and have 1 to 20 percent normal foliage or the percent of foliage missing combined with the percent of leaves that are over 50 percent damaged or missing should equal 80 percent or more of the live crown. Twigs and branches that are dead because of normal shading are not included.

Code is also used for saplings that have no crown by definition.

104

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter IX CROWNS: MEASUREMENTS AND SAMPLING

DENSITY

CROWN DENSITY estimates crown condition in relation to a typical tree for the site where it is found. CROWN

DENSITY also serves as an indicator of expected growth in the near future. CROWN DENSITY is the amount of crown branches, foliage and reproductive structures that blocks light visibility through the crown. Each tree species has a normal crown that varies with the site, genetics, tree damage, etc.

To determine the crown shape, select the crown base on the stem used for UNCOMPACTED LIVE CROWN

RATIO. Project a full "mirror image" crown based on that tree’s shape. Include missing or dead tops. Project half-sided trees as full crowns by using the "mirror image" of the existing half of the crown. Foliage below the crown base is not included (Figure 12-1). Include CROWN DIEBACK and open areas in this outline (Figures 12-11 and 12-12).

After determining the crown shape, each person should use the crown density - foliage transparency card (Figure

12-2). Along the line of sight, estimate what percentage of the outlined area is blocking sunlight. In cases where portions of the tree may be missing, i.e., half-sided trees, it may be easier to determine the percent of the crown shape missing and the actual density of the tree's remaining portion. Then use the table on the back of the crown density - foliage transparency card to arrive at the final CROWN DENSITY. When two individuals disagree with their estimates, follow the guidelines listed at the end of section 12.1 Overview . The estimate is placed into one of

21 percentage classes.

Figure 12-11. CROWN DENSITY rating outline examples.

105

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter IX CROWNS: MEASUREMENTS AND SAMPLING

Figure 12-12. Crown density outline and rating examples

When collected: All live trees > 5.0 in DBH

Field width: 2 digits

Tolerance: +/- 10% (2 classes)

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values:

15

20

25

30

Code

00

05

10

Definition

No crown

1-5%

6-10%

11-15%

16-20%

21-25%

26-30%

Code

35

40

45

50

55

60

65

Definition

31-35%

36-40%

41-45%

46-50%

51-55%

56-60%

61-65%

Code

70

75

80

85

90

95

99

Definition

66-70%

71-75%

76-80%

81-85%

86-90%

91-95%

96-100%

Note: Class code is the percentage of the upper limits of the class, i.e., Code 10 is 6% to 10%, etc

DIEBACK

CROWN DIEBACK estimates reflect the severity of recent stresses on a tree. Estimate CROWN DIEBACK as a percentage of the live crown area, including the dieback area. The crown base should be the same as that used for the UNCOMPACTED LIVE CROWN RATIO estimate. Assume the perimeter of the crown is a two-dimensional outline from branch-tip to branch-tip, excluding snag branches and large holes or gaps in the crown (Figures 12-13 and 12-14).

Project a two-dimensional crown outline, block in the dieback and estimate the dieback area. When two individuals disagree with their estimates, follow the guidelines listed at the end of section 12.1 Overview . The estimate is placed into one of 21 percentage classes.

106

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter IX CROWNS: MEASUREMENTS AND SAMPLING

Figure 12-13. CROWN DIEBACK rating outline examples.

107

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter IX CROWNS: MEASUREMENTS AND SAMPLING

Figure 12-14. Dieback outline and rating examples.

When collected: All live trees > 5.0 in DBH

Field width: 2 digits

Tolerance: +/- 10% (2 classes)

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values:

15

20

25

30

Code

00

05

10

Definition

0%

1-5%

6-10%

11-15%

16-20%

21-25%

26-30%

Code

35

40

45

50

55

60

65

Definition

31-35%

36-40%

41-45%

46-50%

51-55%

56-60%

61-65%

Code

70

75

80

85

90

95

99

Definition

66-70%

71-75%

76-80%

81-85%

86-90%

91-95%

96-100%

Note: Class code is the percentage of the upper limits of the class, i.e., Code 10 is 6% to 10%, etc.

108

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter IX CROWNS: MEASUREMENTS AND SAMPLING

TRANSPARENCY

Foliage transparency is the amount of skylight visible through the live, normally foliated portion (where you see foliage, normal or damaged, or remnants of its recent presence) of the crown. A recently defoliated tree except for one or two live leaves should have a transparency rating of 99 not 0!! Check with binoculars to assess which branches are alive and should have foliage.

Different tree species have a normal range of foliage transparency, which may be more or less than that of other species. Changes in foliage transparency can also occur because of current defoliation or stresses during the current or preceding years.

Estimate FOLIAGE TRANSPARENCY using the crown density - foliage transparency card (Figure 12-2). Exclude vine foliage from the transparency estimate as best you can. Dead branches in the lower live crown, snag branches, crown dieback and missing branches or areas where foliage is expected to be missing are deleted from the estimate (Figure 12-15).

When defoliation is severe, branches alone will screen the light, but you should exclude the branches from the foliage outline and rate the area as if the light was penetrating those branches. For example, an almost completely defoliated dense spruce may have less than 20 percent skylight coming through the crown, but it will be rated as highly transparent because of the missing foliage. Old trees and some hardwood species, have crowns with densely foliated branches that are widely spaced. These spaces between branches should not be included in the

FOLIAGE TRANSPARENCY rating. When FOLIAGE TRANSPARENCY in one part of the crown differs from another part, the average FOLIAGE TRANSPARENCY is estimated.

Project a two-dimensional crown outline. Determine the foliated area within the crown outline and estimate the transparency of the normally foliated area.

Transparency 15%

for both trees

109

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter IX CROWNS: MEASUREMENTS AND SAMPLING

When collected: All live trees > 5.0 in DBH

Field width: 2 digits

Tolerance: +/- 10% (2 classes)

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values:

15

20

25

30

Code

00

05

10

Definition

0%

1-5%

6-10%

11-15%

16-20%

21-25%

26-30%

Code

35

40

45

50

55

60

65

Definition

31-35%

36-40%

41-45%

46-50%

51-55%

56-60%

61-65%

Code

70

75

80

85

90

95

Definition

66-70%

71-75%

76-80%

81-85%

86-90%

91-95%

99 96-100%

Note: Class code is the percentage of the upper limits of the class, i.e., Code 10 is 6% to 10%, etc.

12.12 ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

Contact information for the National Advisor for this indicator is: Michael Schomaker, 5400 Vardon Way, Fort

Collins, CO 80528-9114 or email mschomak@lamar.colostate.edu

.

110

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter X DOWN WOODY MATERIALS

X. DOWN WOODY MATERIALS

NOTE:

This chapter is for P3 plots only, a select few of the many plots being installed this season

(approx 5%) will make use of the variables contained within. To ascertain the P2/P3 status of the plot look at the plot folder, if there is a P3 printed, then P3 as well as P2 data will be collected. Down Woody

Materials data entry screens are available from the Plot Menu.

Section 14

14.0

INTRODUCTION

14.1

DEFINITION OF DOWN WOODY MATERIAL 113

14.2

LOCATING AND ESTABLISHING LINE TRANSECTS

14.2.1

CWD transects.................................................................................................................114

14.2.2

FWD transects .................................................................................................................114

14.3 TRANSECT LINE SEGMENTING

14.3.1

SUBPLOT NUMBER........................................................................................................116

14.3.2

TRANSECT .....................................................................................................................116

14.3.3

CONDITION CLASS NUMBER .......................................................................................116

14.3.4

BEGINNING DISTANCE..................................................................................................117

14.3.5

SLOPE PERCENT...........................................................................................................117

14.3.6

ENDING DISTANCE........................................................................................................117

14.4 Sampling Methods for COARSE WOODY DEBRIS (CWD)

14.4.1

Tally Rules for Coarse Woody Debris (CWD)..................................................................117

14.4.2

Marking CWD...................................................................................................................120

14.4.3

Recording Procedures for CWD ......................................................................................120

14.4.3.1 SUBPLOT NUMBER................................................................................................120

14.4.3.2 TRANSECT..............................................................................................................120

14.4.3.3 CWD SLOPE DISTANCE ........................................................................................120

14.4.3.4 CWD DECAY CLASS ..............................................................................................121

14.4.3.5 SPECIES .................................................................................................................122

14.4.3.6 Diameters.................................................................................................................122

14.4.3.6.1 DIAMETER AT POINT OF INTERSECTION .............................................................................. 123

14.4.3.6.2 DIAMETER AT THE SMALL END ................................................................................................ 123

14.4.3.6.3 DIAMETER AT THE LARGE END ............................................................................................... 124

14.4.3.7 CWD TOTAL LENGTH ............................................................................................124

14.4.3.8 IS THE PIECE HOLLOW? .......................................................................................124

14.4.3.9 CWD HISTORY .......................................................................................................125

14.5 SAMPLING METHODS FOR FINE WOODY DEBRIS (FWD)

14.5.1

SUBPLOT NUMBER........................................................................................................126

14.5.2

CONDITION CLASS NUMBER .......................................................................................127

14.5.3

SMALL FWD COUNT ......................................................................................................127

14.5.4

MEDIUM FWD COUNT ...................................................................................................127

14.5.5

LARGE FWD COUNT......................................................................................................127

14.5.6

HIGH COUNT REASON ..................................................................................................127

14.5.7

RESIDUE PILE ON TRANSECT .....................................................................................128

111

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter X DOWN WOODY MATERIALS

14.6 DUFF, LITTER, AND FUELBED DEPTH MEASUREMENTS

14.6.1

Definitions ........................................................................................................................128

14.6.2

Overview of Measurements .............................................................................................129

14.6.2.1 Duff and Litter ...........................................................................................................129

14.6.2.2 Fuelbed ....................................................................................................................129

14.6.3

SUBPLOT NUMBER........................................................................................................130

14.6.4

TRANSECT .....................................................................................................................130

14.6.5

DUFF, LITTER, AND FUELBED SAMPLE ......................................................................130

14.6.6

DUFF DEPTH ..................................................................................................................130

14.6.7

LITTER DEPTH ...............................................................................................................131

14.6.8

FUELBED DEPTH ...........................................................................................................131

14.7 FUEL LOADING ON THE MICROPLOT

14.7.1

SUBPLOT NUMBER........................................................................................................132

14.7.2

LIVE SHRUB PERCENT COVER....................................................................................132

14.7.3

LIVE SHRUB HEIGHT .....................................................................................................133

14.7.4

DEAD SHRUBS PERCENT COVER ...............................................................................133

14.7.5

DEAD SHRUB HEIGHT...................................................................................................133

14.7.6

LIVE HERBS PERCENT COVER....................................................................................133

14.7.7

LIVE HERBS HEIGHT .....................................................................................................134

14.7.8

DEAD HERBS PERCENT COVER..................................................................................134

14.7.9

DEAD HERBS HEIGHT ...................................................................................................134

14.7.10 LITTER PERCENT COVER............................................................................................134

14.8 SAMPLING RESIDUE PILES

14.8.1

SUBPLOT NUMBER........................................................................................................136

14.8.2

CONDITION CLASS ........................................................................................................136

14.8.3

PILE AZIMUTH ................................................................................................................136

14.8.4

PILE SHAPE....................................................................................................................136

14.8.5 PILE LENGTH 1 ..............................................................................................................137

14.8.6 PILE LENGTH 2 ..............................................................................................................137

14.8.7

PILE WIDTH 1 .................................................................................................................137

14.8.8

PILE WIDTH 2 .................................................................................................................137

14.8.9

PILE HEIGHT 1 ...............................................................................................................137

14.8.10 PILE HEIGHT 2...............................................................................................................138

14.8.11 PILE DENSITY................................................................................................................138

14.9 ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS 138

DWM DATA SHEETS 139

112

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter X DOWN WOODY MATERIALS

14.0 INTRODUCTION

NOTE: Most of this chapter is accessible by entering “Down wood m” in the Plot Menu. The only exception is section 14.7 FUEL LOADING ON THE MICROPLOT. Refer to the beginning of that section for further instructions.

Down woody materials (DWM) are an important component of forest ecosystems across the country. DWM is dead material on the ground in various stages of decay. Wildlife biologists, ecologists, mycologists, foresters, and fuels specialists are some of the people interested in DWM because it helps describe the:

• Quality and status of wildlife habitats.

• Structural diversity within a forest.

• Fuel loading and fire behavior.

• Carbon sequestration – the amount of carbon tied up in dead wood.

• Storage and cycling of nutrients and water – important for site productivity.

Down woody components and fuels estimated by the FIA program are: coarse woody, fine woody, litter, herb/shrubs, slash, duff, and fuelbed depth. Any crew member can learn to collect down woody materials data. If untrained members of the crew are available to help, they can locate, measure, and flag transect lines and record the condition class information for the transect segments.

DWM is only sampled in accessible forest conditions intersected by the transect. If a transect crosses a nonforest condition, the boundaries of the condition are recorded (see section 14.3) but no DWM or fuels measurements are taken along this portion of the transect. The majority of DWM in the inventory is sampled using the line intersect sampling method (also called planar intercept method). In this method, transects are established, and individual pieces of CWD or FWD are tallied if the central axis of the piece is intersected by the plane of the transect. In addition, each piece must meet specified dimensions and other criteria before being selected for tally. Special procedures apply when a CWD piece lays across a condition class boundary (section 14.2). Transects will always be used to sample FWD. Transects will be used to sample CWD when crews are able to see and measure individual pieces.

The line intersect method is not practical for sampling CWD when it is part of machine-piled windrows or slash piles, or part of log "jumbles" at the bottom of steep-sided ravines. In these situations, individual pieces are impractical to tally separately and are labeled as “residue piles”. A different sampling method is used to tally and measure CWD residue piles (see section 14.8, Sampling Residue Piles).

14.1 DEFINITION OF DOWN WOODY MATERIALS

CWD – In this inventory, CWD includes downed, dead tree and shrub boles, large limbs, and other woody pieces that are severed from their original source of growth and on the ground. CWD also includes dead trees (either selfsupported by roots, severed from roots, or uprooted) that are leaning > 45 degrees from vertical. Also included are non-machine processed round wood such as fence posts and cabin logs.

CWD does not include:

1. Woody pieces < 3.0 inches in diameter at the point of intersection with the transect.

2. Dead trees leaning 0 to 45 degrees from vertical.

3. Dead shrubs, self-supported by their roots.

4. Trees showing any sign of life.

5. Stumps that are rooted in the ground (i.e., not uprooted).

6. Dead foliage, bark or other non-woody pieces that are not an integral part of a bole or limb. (Bark attached to a portion of a piece is an integral part).

7. Roots or main bole below the root collar.

FWD – In this inventory, FWD includes downed, dead branches, twigs, and small tree or shrub boles that are not attached to a living or standing dead source. FWD can be connected to a larger branch, as long as this branch is on the ground and not connected to a standing dead or live tree. Only the woody branches, twigs, and fragments that intersect the transect are counted. FWD can be connected to a down, dead tree bole or down, dead shrub.

FWD can be twigs from shrubs and vines. FWD must be no higher than 6 feet above the ground to be counted.

113

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter X DOWN WOODY MATERIALS

FWD does not include:

1) Woody pieces > 3.0 inches in diameter at the point of intersection with the transect.

2) Dead branches connected to a live tree or shrub; or to a standing dead tree or dead shrub.

3) Dead foliage (i.e., pine or fir needles, or leaf petioles).

4) Bark fragments or other non-woody pieces that are not an integral part of a branch, twig, or small bole.

5) Small pieces of decomposed wood (i.e., chunks of cubical rot)

14.2 LOCATING AND ESTABLISHING LINE TRANSECTS

Transects are established on each subplot if the subplot center is accessible (i.e., not census water, access denied, or hazardous), and there is at least one forest land condition class mapped within the 24.0-foot radius subplot

(CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1). Transects begin at the subplot center and extend 24.0 feet to the edge of the subplot. The location of condition class boundaries are recorded along the transect. It is extremely important to lay out the transect in a straight line to avoid biasing the selection of pieces and to allow the remeasurement of transect lines and tally pieces for future change detection.

Transect lines should be marked with a pin or small piece of flagging at the end of the line (24.0 feet, horizontal distance) to help the QA staff identify the path of the transect during the check-plot procedure. Because the tolerance for the transect azimuth is +/- 2 degrees, the line might have been laid down in a slightly different direction from the check-plot crew. This could affect the location of diameter measurements for CWD pieces as well as identifying whether a CWD piece is a valid tally piece. It is also helpful to mark the point where the FWD transect begins (14 feet, slope distance).

14.2.1 CWD transects

Three transects are established that originate at the subplot center and extend out 24.0 feet horizontal distance (the radius of the subplot) at azimuths of 30, 150, 270 degrees (Figure 14-1). This transect configuration was chosen to avoid sampling bias on sloped land, where it is possible that CWD may be oriented in one direction. This configuration of transects should pick up CWD logs that are lying parallel to the slope, perpendicular to the slope, and across slope.

14.2.2 FWD transects

One transect is established on each subplot, along the 150 degree azimuth. FWD is tallied within 3 size classes.

Because FWD is generally present in higher densities, a shorter transect will pick up an acceptable amount of tally.

The transect begins at 14 feet (slope distance) from the subplot center and extends out either 6 or 10 feet (slope distance) depending on the FWD size class, as follows:

Category of FWD

Small FWD

Medium FWD

Size Class

1

2

Diameter range

Transect length

(slope distance)

0 in to 0.24 in 6 feet

0.25 in to 0.9 in 6 feet

Transect location

(slope distance)

14 to 20 feet

14 to 20 feet

Large FWD 3 1.0 in to 2.9 in 10 feet 14 to 24 feet

Note that the FWD transects are slope distance not horizontal distance. The formulas used to estimate biomass from the data contain an adjustment for slope. It is helpful to have a size gauge available until your eye is ‘trained’ to recognize the 3 size classes. Examples include a plastic or cardboard card with 3 notches cut for each size class, or a set of 3 dowels representing each size class.

114

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter X DOWN WOODY MATERIALS

2

30°

Transect Information

270°

FWD < 0.25”&

0.26”-0.99” 6 ft. s.d.

FWD 1.00”-2.99”

10 ft. s.d.

150°

30°

CWD ≥

3.00”

24 ft. h.d.

N

1

270° s.d.= slope dist., h.d.=horizontal dist.

30° 30°

Key

4

150°

3 Sub-plot

270° 270°

Micro-plot

CWD Tran.

FWD Tran.

150° 150°

Dist. between sub-plots (2, 3, and 4) and sub-plot center (1): 120 ft at angles (deg.) 0, 120, and

240 respectively; dist. between subplot center and microplot center: 12 ft.; shrubs/herbs sampled on microplot. Duff/litter sampled at 24 ft slope dist. on each CWD transect.

Figure 14-1. Plot layout for sampling CWD, FWD, and fuels.

14.3 TRANSECT LINE SEGMENTING

Transect lines are segmented to determine the length of transect that occurs within each mapped condition class intersecting the line. A segment is a length of transect that is in one condition. Segments are identified by recording the BEGINNING DISTANCE and ENDING DISTANCE of the slope from subplot center out to the end of the subplot. In the office, the segmenting data will be combined with CWD distances to determine which condition class each piece falls in (condition classes are not assigned to CWD pieces in the field). If more than one condition is found on the FWD transects, the segmenting information recorded here will provide the length of transect in each condition.

Starting at the subplot center and working towards the fixed radius plot boundary, each segment of transect line in a different condition class is delineated and recorded as a separate record. On each record, the BEGINNING

DISTANCE and ENDING DISTANCE of the slope are recorded for each condition class encountered. The first record for each transect will have a BEGINNING DISTANCE of 0 feet. If only one condition class occurs on the transect line, only one segment is recorded. The transect must extend a total of 24.0 feet horizontal distance. If the entire 24.0-foot subplot is nonforest, enter codes for SUBPLOT NUMBER, TRANSECT, CONDITION CLASS

NUMBER, followed by zeros in the remaining fields.

On subplots where a transect intersects a boundary between condition classes, the transect continues across the boundary into the adjacent class (Figure 14-2). Although DWM is only sampled in accessible forest conditions, all

CONDITION CLASS BOUNDARIES (BEGINNING DISTANCE and ENDING DISTANCE) are recorded on each transect.

Individual pieces of DWM intersected by a transect are tallied or counted if they meet the tally rules for CWD or

FWD specified in the sections that follow. It is expected that the majority of FWD transects will be in one condition, but if the condition class changes along the transect, a count is recorded for each condition. Again, the segmenting data recorded here will identify which condition class is associated with each count.

115

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter X DOWN WOODY MATERIALS

C le a rc u t

H a rd w o o d fo re s t

S a p lin g s

O ld g ro w th

S e c o n d g ro w th C ro p la n d

O ld g ro w th

Figure 14-2. Transects are installed across condition class boundaries.

14.3.1 SUBPLOT NUMBER

Record the code indicating the subplot center from which the transect originates.

When collected: All tally segments

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values: 1 to 4 subplot subplot subplot subplot

14.3.2 TRANSECT

Record the code indicating the transect on which a condition class is being delineated. The three transects used are 30 degrees, 150 degrees, and 270 degrees. These transects, when being installed, have a tolerance of +/- 2 degrees.

When Collected: All tally segments

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values:

030 Transect extends 30 degrees from subplot center

150 Transect extends 150 degrees from subplot center

270 Transect extends 270 degrees from subplot center

14.3.3 CONDITION CLASS NUMBER

Record the code indicating the number of the condition class for the transect segment. Use the same code assigned to the condition class on the subplot or elsewhere on the plot. The first segment recorded for each transect will have the same CONDITION CLASS NUMBER as assigned to the subplot center.

When collected: All tally segments

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values: 1 to 9

116

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter X DOWN WOODY MATERIALS

14.3.4 BEGINNING DISTANCE

Record the location (using slope distance) on the transect line where the transect intersects the boundary with the adjacent condition class nearer to the subplot center. The first record for each transect will have a

BEGINNING DISTANCE of 00.0 ft. Each subsequent record will have a BEGINNING DISTANCE equal to the

ENDING DISTANCE of the previous record. Measure to the nearest 0.1 ft.

When collected: All tally segments

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: +/- 1.0 ft

MQO: At least 95% of the time

Values: 00.0 to 99.9

14.3.5 SLOPE PERCENT

Record the code indicating the average slope percent along the transect within the condition class being segmented. When only one condition class is present on a transect, slope percent is the average slope percent along the entire transect. Measure to the nearest 5%.

When collected: All tally segments

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: +/- 10%

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values: 005 to 155

14.3.6 ENDING DISTANCE

Record the location (using slope distance) on the transect line where the transect exits the condition class being delineated and intersects the boundary with a different condition class further away from the subplot center. If no other condition classes are encountered, record the location (using slope distance) of the end of the transect line. Measure to the nearest 0.1 foot.

When collected: All tally segments

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: +/- 1.0 ft

MQO: At least 95% of the time

Values: 00.1 to 99.9

14.4 Sampling Methods for COARSE WOODY DEBRIS (CWD)

14.4.1 Tally Rules for Coarse Woody Debris (CWD)

1. Coarse woody debris (CWD) is sampled in accessible forest land conditions only.

Tally a piece if its central longitudinal axis intersects the transect, and the condition class is accessible forest land at the point of intersection (Figure 14-3). The entire piece is assigned to this condition.

Condition class 1

(accessible forest land)

Point of intersection

Figure 14-3. Tally rules for CWD.

Transect line

Central longitudinal axis

117

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter X DOWN WOODY MATERIALS

2. Tally dead trees and tall stumps that are leaning > 45 degrees from vertical. Do not tally live trees or standing dead trees and stumps that are still upright and leaning < 45 degrees from vertical. Follow the same rules for down trees as outlined in section 5.0 ‘Tree and Sapling Data’ from the P2 field guide. Most CWD will be laying on the ground.

3. The minimum length of any tally piece is 3.0 feet. When CWD pieces are close to 3 feet, measure the length to the nearest 0.1 f00t to determine if it is >3.0 feet.

4. Decay class of the piece determines whether or not the piece is tallied (see section 14.4.3.4).

Decay Diameter is > 3” for at least 3.0’.

For decay classes 1 to 4: tally a piece if it is > 3.0 inches in diameter at the point of intersection with the transect. The piece must be > 3.0 feet in length and > 3.0 inches or more in

Classes

1-4

3” diam

Tally if intersected by the transect in this segment. diameter along that length. If the intersect diameter is close to

3.0 inches, measure the diameter to the nearest 0.1 inch to determine if the piece qualifies (Figure 14-4).

For decay class 5: tally a piece if it is > 5.0 inches in diameter at the point of intersection and > 5.0 inches high from the ground.

The piece must be > 3.0 feet in length and > 5.0 inches or more in diameter along that length. The reason for treating decay class 5 pieces differently is because they are difficult to identify, especially when heavily decomposed. Only pieces that still have some shape and log form are tallied—humps of decomposed wood that are becoming part of the duff layer are not tallied.

Diameter is < 3”

Do not tally (as CWD) if intersected by the transect in this segment.

Figure 14-4. CWD tally rules for decay classes 1-4.

5. Tally pieces created by natural causes (examples: natural breakage or uprooting) or by human activities such as cutting only if not systematically machine-piled. Do not record pieces that are part of machine-piled slash piles or windrows, or that are part of a log "jumble" at the bottom of a steep-sided ravine in which individual pieces are impractical to tally separately. Instead, sample these piles according to instructions in section 14.8

‘Sampling Residue Piles’. A slash pile or windrow consists of broken logs, limbs, and other vegetative debris.

6. Tally a piece only if the point of intersection occurs above the ground. If one end of a piece is buried in the litter, duff, or mineral soil, the piece ends at the point where it is no longer visible. Measure the diameter and length at this point.

7. If the central longitudinal axis of a piece is intersected more than once on a transect line or if it is intersected by two transect lines, tally the piece each time it is intersected (uncommon situation, see Figure 14-5).

Tally piece twice

Points of intersection

Figure 14-5. CWD tally rules: intersections.

Tally piece twice

118

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter X DOWN WOODY MATERIALS

8. Tally a piece only once if the subplot center falls directly on the central longitudinal axis of the piece. Tally the piece on the 30 degree transect and record the CWD Distance as 001.

9. If a piece is fractured across its diameter or length, and would pull apart at the fracture if pulled from either end or sides, treat it as two separate pieces. If judged that it would not pull apart, tally as one piece. Tally only the piece intersected by the transect line.

10. Do not tally a piece if it intersects the transect on the root side of the root collar. Do not tally roots.

11. When the transect crosses a forked down tree bole or large branch connected to a down tree, tally each qualifying piece separately. To be tallied, each individual piece must meet the minimum diameter and length requirements.

12. In the case of forked trees, consider the "main bole" to be the piece with the largest diameter at the fork.

Variables for this fork such as TOTAL LENGTH and DECAY CLASS should pertain to the entire main bole. For smaller forks or branches connected to a main bole (even if the main bole is not a tally piece), variables pertain only to that portion of the piece up to the point where it attaches to the main bole (see Figure 14-6).

SMALL-END

DIAMETER = 3"

Total length

CWD Total-Length of second fork

LARGE-END DIAMETER at fork = 10"

DIAMETER

LARGE-END DIAMETER at fork = 20”

LARGE END

15”

Large branch tallied

as one piece

Each fork is tallied as a separate piece

CWD Total Length

Transect line

Main bole

(not tallied)

Larger diameter fork is considered the main bole

Figure 14-6. CWD tally rules for forked trees.

13. If a transect intersects a nonforest condition (e.g., a road), no CWD is tallied.

119

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter X DOWN WOODY MATERIALS

14.4.2 Marking CWD

Marking CWD is optional. Marked CWD is an aid to future crews returning to the plot for a QA check or to remeasure the plot at the next remeasurement period. Nails can be used to mark the location of the point of intersection, if the piece is in decay class 1, 2, or 3. Position the nail on top of the piece, and if possible, drive the nail into the piece so that about 1 inch of the nail is left exposed. Stop driving the nail if the next blow means breaking the piece or seriously disturbing the location of the piece. Please see section 14.3 Transect Line

Segmenting, for information on the required marking of the transect line.

14.4.3 Recording Procedures for CWD

The tolerance for the total number of pieces (> 3 inches, transect diameter) tallied across all transects on the plot is

: +/- 2 piece or +/- 5%, whichever is greater for the plot. Note: always round up to a whole piece count when using the 5% option.

14.4.3.1 SUBPLOT NUMBER

Record the code indicating the number of the subplot center from which the transect originates.

When collected: All tally pieces

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values: 1 to 4 subplot subplot

4 Southwest

14.4.3.2 TRANSECT

Record the code indicating the azimuth of the transect on which the piece is sampled.

When Collected: All tally pieces

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values:

030 Transect extends 30 degrees from subplot center

150 Transect extends 150 degrees from subplot center

270 Transect extends 270 degrees from subplot center

14.4.3.3 CWD SLOPE DISTANCE

Record the code indicating the slope distance from the subplot center to the point where the transect intersects the longitudinal center of the piece. If two or more pieces have the same slope distances, record the top piece first. Measure and record to the nearest 0.1 feet. CWD SLOPE DISTANCE is an important item because it will be used to assign the CWD piece to a condition class by comparing the recorded distance to the piece with the recorded BEGINNING DISTANCE and ENDING DISTANCE to the condition class boundary. CWD SLOPE

DISTANCE is also used to locate the piece for QA and remeasurement in future inventories.

When Collected: All tally pieces

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: +/- 1.0 ft

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values: 00.1 to 99.9

120

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter X DOWN WOODY MATERIALS

14.4.3.4 CWD DECAY CLASS

Record a 1-digit code indicating the decay class of the piece. Code the decay class which predominates along the recorded CWD TOTAL LENGTH (14.4.3.7) of the piece. Use the guide below to determine CWD DECAY

CLASS.

When Collected: All tally pieces

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: +/- 1 class

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values:

Decay

Class

Structural

Integrity

Texture of

Rotten Portions

Color of

Wood

Invading

Roots Branches and Twigs

1

2

3

Sound, freshly fallen, intact logs

Heartwood sound; piece supports its own weight

Intact, no rot; conks of stem decay absent

Original color Absent sapwood partly soft

Original color Absent

(starting to decay) but can’t be pulled apart by hand

Hard, large pieces; Sapwood only sapwood can be pulled apart by hand or sapwood absent

Reddish- brown or original color

Soft, small blocky pieces; a metal pin can be pushed into heartwood

Reddish or light brown

If branches are present, fine twigs are still attached and have tight bark

If branches are present, many fine twigs are gone and remaining fine twigs have peeling bark

Branch stubs will not pull out

Through-out Branch stubs pull out 4

5

Heartwood rotten; piece does not support its own weight, but maintains its shape

None, piece no longer maintains its shape, it spreads out on ground

Soft; powdery when dry

Red-brown to dark brown stubs pitch pockets have usually rotted down

Note: CWD DECAY CLASS 5 pieces can be difficult to identify because they often blend into the duff and litter layers. They must still resemble a log, therefore, the first tally rule is that they must be > 5.0 inches in diameter, >

5.0 inches from the surface of the ground, and at least 3.0 feet long. Decomposed logs that are slightly elevated

‘humps’ on the ground are not tallied.

CWD DECAY CLASS: The chart above was developed primarily for Douglas-fir in the Pacific Northwest. At the present time, there are no other charts available to use to describe decay classes for other species or locations.

Concentrate on the structural integrity and texture when estimating a decay class for CWD logs.

If a log is case hardened (hard, intact outer sapwood shell) but the heartwood is rotten, code this log as a CWD

DECAY CLASS 2 with a HOLLOW PIECE code of 1. CWD DECAY CLASS 1 should be reserved for ‘freshly fallen’ logs that are completely intact (i.e., recent windfalls, or harvest).

121

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter X DOWN WOODY MATERIALS

14.4.3.5 SPECIES

Record the code indicating the species of the piece. Species codes are the same as those used in P2 (see

Appendix 3 of the P2 field guide). Because CWD includes the tally of large shrub boles and woody vines, enter a code of ‘0001’ for SPECIES if the tally piece is a shrub or vine.

Species identification may be uncertain for some pieces. The piece's bark (either attached or sloughed and laying beside the piece), branching pattern (if the branches are still present), or heartwood smell (particularly if cedars, Douglas-fir, or western hemlock) may provide clues. On remeasurement plots, see what tree species were tallied in past inventories. One way to distinguish hardwoods from softwoods is by the type of decay present. Hardwoods usually have a white or grayish stringy rot, while softwoods usually have a reddish-brown blocky rot. If it is not possible to identify the species, attempt to estimate if it is softwood or hardwood . Enter code 0299 for unknown conifer or 0998 for unknown hardwood. If all else fails, enter the unknown

SPECIES code (0999).

When Collected: CWD DECAY CLASS = 1 to 4

Field width: 4 digits

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 80% of the time

Values:

CODE SPECIES CODE SPECIES

011 Pacific redcedar

019 subalpine hemlock

094 white alder

095 black birch

098 sitka aspen

14.4.3.6 Diameters

The diameter is most commonly measured by holding a tape above the log, at a position perpendicular to the length (Figure 14-7). It is useful to carry a steel carpenters retracting tape to measure diameters. Other methods include wrapping a tape around the bole if possible, holding a straight-edge ruler above the piece, or using calipers.

DIAMETER MEASUREMENTS

Small-end diameter tapers to 3” before the end of log

Small-end diameter measured at the point before the log splinters or crumbles

Large-end diameter measured at the point that best represents the overall log volume. (before the wood crumbles and falls apart due to decay)

3.0 inch small-end diameter

6.0 inch small-end diameter

18.0 inch largeend diameter

Figure 14-7. Diameter measurements

For pieces that are not round in cross-section because of missing chunks of wood or "settling" due to decay, measure the diameter in two directions and take an average. Estimate the longest and shortest axis of the crosssection ("A" and "B" in Figure 14-8), and enter the average in the diameter field. This technique applies to intersect, small-end, and large-end diameters.

122

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter X DOWN WOODY MATERIALS

Figure 14-8. Estimating the diameter of pieces that are not round in cross-section.

If the transect intersects the log at the decayed or splintered end (Figure 14-9) (i.e., the portion where we do not consider it part of the log because it is falling apart), record the diameter at this location as the intersect diameter, but record the large end and small end diameter according to our established rules (i.e., at the points where they best represent the log volume). If the splintered end appears to be two separate pieces (i.e., a major split located just at the end) – in this situation treat it as one log and take a diameter around the end (take two measurements if it is odd shaped). Length would be measured between the large and small end diameters.

(Transect) LARGE END DIAMETER measured here

SMALL END DIAMETER measured here

Figure 14-9. Example of decayed end intersecting the transect

14.4.3.6.1 DIAMETER AT POINT OF INTERSECTION

Record the code indicating the piece's diameter at the point where the transect intersects the longitudinal center of the piece. If the diameter is close to 3 inches, measure the diameter to the nearest 0.1 inch to determine if the piece is actually >3.0 inches and a valid tally piece. The diameter is recorded to the nearest inch.

When Collected: All tally pieces

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: Pieces < 20.0 in diameter: +/- 3 in

Pieces > 20.0 in diameter: +/- 20%

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values: 003 to 200

14.4.3.6.2 DIAMETER AT THE SMALL END

Record the code indicating the diameter at the piece's small end. The diameter is recorded to the nearest inch. The DIAMETER AT THE SMALL END occurs either at (1) the actual end of the piece, if the end has a diameter > 3.0 inches, or (2) at the point where the piece tapers down to 3.0 inches in diameter. If the end is splintered or decomposing (sloughing off), measure the diameter at the point where it best represents the overall log volume. Use the same measuring procedures described in 14.4.3.6.1 (see Figure 14-7).

When Collected: CWD DECAY CLASS = 1 to 4

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance Pieces < 20.0 in diameter: +/- 2 in

Pieces > 20.0 in diameter: +/- 10%

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values: 003 to 200

123

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter X DOWN WOODY MATERIALS

14.4.3.6.3 DIAMETER AT THE LARGE END

Record the code indicating the diameter at the piece's large end. The diameter is recorded to the nearest inch.

The large end will occur either at a broken or sawn end, at a fracture, or at the root collar. If the end is splintered or decomposing (sloughing off), measure the diameter at the point where it best represents the overall log volume. Use the same measuring procedures used for 14.4.3.6.1.

When Collected: CWD DECAY CLASS = 1 to 4

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: Pieces < 20.0 in diameter: +/- 2 in

Pieces > 20.0 in diameter: +/- 15%

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values: 003 to 200

14.4.3.7 CWD TOTAL LENGTH

Record the code indicating the total length of the piece. CWD TOTAL LENGTH is the length of the piece that lies between the piece's recorded DIAMETER AT THE SMALL END AND DIAMETER AT THE LARGE END

(14.4.3.6.2 & 14.4.3.6.3). For DECAY CLASS = 5, DIAMETER AT THE SMALL END AND DIAMETER AT THE

LARGE END are not recorded for a log, therefore the length is measured between the two physical ends of the log. For curved logs, measure along the curve. The minimum log length is 3.0 feet before it is a valid tally log.

When the length is close to 3.0 feet, measure the length to determine if the piece is actually >3.0 feet. CWD

TOTAL LENGTH is recorded to the nearest foot.

When Collected: All tally pieces

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: + / - 20%

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values: 003 to 250

14.4.3.8 IS THE PIECE HOLLOW?

Record the code indicating whether or not the piece is hollow (see Figure 14-10).

The entrance is the first point on the piece with wood all around the cavity

The diameter at the entrance of the cavity must be > ¼ of the total diameter of the log at that point

Length of cavity must be > 2 feet, before it is classified as a hollow log.

Figure 14-10. Determining if the piece is hollow.

124

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter X DOWN WOODY MATERIALS

When Collected: CWD DECAY CLASS = 1 to 4

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values:

Y A piece is considered hollow if a cavity extends at least 2 feet along the central longitudinal axis of the piece, and the diameter of the entrance to the cavity is at least

1/4 of the diameter of the piece where the entrance occurs. The entrance occurs at the point where the circumference of the cavity is whole -- the point where wood is present completely around the circumference of the cavity. The length of the cavity begins at this point.

N Does not meet criteria for being a hollow log

14.4.3.9 CWD HISTORY

Record the code that indicates whether or not the piece of CWD is on the ground as a result of harvesting operations or as a result of natural circumstances. One objective of this item is to identify those pieces that are considered logging residue. If the piece appears to have fallen to the ground as a result of natural causes such as decomposition or windfall, enter a code of 1. This category would include blown out tops, snapped off boles, wind-fallen trees on clearcut edges, and trees that basically collapsed and fell over due to decomposition.

If the piece is on the ground as a result of recent (since last annual remeasurement; if the plot is new, the time between the panel remeasurements) harvesting activity, either because the tree was cut down with a chainsaw (or other device) or pushed over by harvesting equipment (bulldozer), enter a code of 2. A code of 2 would be considered logging residue (usually you are in the middle of a recent clearcut).

If the piece is on the ground as a result of older (more than 15 years) harvesting activity, enter a code of 3.

This would be a situation where you tally an old decomposing log that has a sawn end – if it appears that the log was cut and left on site, then enter a code of “3”.

If a piece is on the ground as a result of incidental harvest (such as a standing tree was cut for firewood or small clearing), enter a code of “4”. Incidental harvest involves a few trees and is not a part of a major organized harvesting operation.

If the crew cannot decide the history of the CWD log, classify it as “unknown”, and give it a code of “5”.

When Collected: CWD DECAY CLASS = 1 to 4

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values:

1

2

3

CWD piece is on the ground as a result of natural causes

CWD piece is on the ground as a result of major recent harvest activity (<= 15 yrs old)

CWD piece is on the ground as a result of older harvest activity (> 15 yrs old)

4

5

CWD piece is on the ground as a result of an incidental harvest (such as firewood cutting)

Exact Reason Unknown

14.5 SAMPLING METHODS FOR FINE WOODY DEBRIS (FWD)

1. Fine Woody Debris (FWD) is sampled in accessible forest land conditions. The length of FWD transects are measured in slope distance--no correction is applied to obtain a horizontal distance. The FWD transects start at 14.0 feet slope distance and extend for 6.0 or 10.0 feet slope distance. Estimates of FWD biomass calculated in the office, will include a slope correction factor obtained from the transect segmenting data on the subplot.

125

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter X DOWN WOODY MATERIALS

2. Only sample FWD that intersects a plane from the ground to a height of 6 feet.

3. FWD is sampled in three size classes, on the 150 degree azimuth transect. Two of the FWD size classes

(0.01 to 0.24 inches and 0.25 to 0.9 inches) are counted on a 6-foot transect, from 14 to 20 feet. Pieces in the third size class (1.0 to 2.9 inches) are counted on a 10-foot transect, from 14 to 24 feet (see section

14.2 for details on transects). These transects overlap. Note: individual diameters are not recorded for

FWD.

4. Count a piece of FWD if it intersects the transect, and the condition class is accessible forest land at the point of intersection. Only count a piece if the twig, branch, wood fragment, or shrub/tree bole are woody.

Do not count pine or fir needles or non-woody parts of a tree or shrub.

5. Accumulate the number of pieces counted within each size class and enter the total count on one record for the subplot (unless there are >1 condition classes). If there is no tally on a transect, enter zeros for the count.

6. Accurate counts of FWD can be conducted efficiently up to about 50 pieces for small and medium size classes, and up to 20 pieces for the large size class. After that, crews can begin estimating counts in a systematic fashion. Transects that fall on very dense FWD where counting is nearly impossible, can be subsampled and calculated. For example, an accurate count can be conducted on a 2.0-foot section of the transect and then multiplied by 3 to provide an estimate for the 6 foot transect, as long as the crew feels that the remaining transect has a similar density of FWD pieces.

7. If a transect intersects a large pile of material such as a wood rat’s nest or a recently fallen tree (with many attached fine branches), crews should estimate a count based on #6 above, but also enter a code indicating that this is an unusual situation (see section 14.5.6).

8. If rocks, logs, or other obstructions are present along the transect (14- to 24-foot section) include any FWD that is present on top of these obstructions in the respective FWD counts. If the obstructions are so large

(huge boulder) that the top surface cannot be seen, assume the count is zero in this area, and continue counting if there is transect line beyond the boulder.

9. If a residue pile intersects the FWD transect at any point along the 14- to 24-foot section, do not measure

FWD on this transect. It is too subjective determining exact boundaries of the pile, and how they relate to the exact point on the transect line. To identify this situation, code 1 in RESIDUE PILE ON TRANSECT which indicates that a residue pile has intersected the transect line.

10. If a transect crosses a condition class boundary, record the CONDITION CLASS NUMBER and enter a count for each condition on separate records. Transect lengths within each condition class will be obtained from the transect segmenting data entered for the subplot.

14.5.1 SUBPLOT NUMBER

Record the code indicating the subplot center from which the transect originates.

When collected: All tally segments

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values: 1 to 4 subplot subplot subplot subplot

126

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter X DOWN WOODY MATERIALS

14.5.2 CONDITION CLASS NUMBER

Record the code indicating the number of the condition class that pertains to the FWD count.

When collected: All tally segments

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values: 1 to 9

14.5.3 SMALL FWD COUNT

Record the number of pieces counted in this size class (0.01 to 0.24-inch diameter) along the transect segment. An accurate count should be conducted up to 50 pieces. If the count exceeds 50, the transect can be subsampled to estimate a total count for the transect segment (see 14.5, #6)

When collected: On the 150 degree transect in CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance:0 to 50 = +/- 20% of the total count for the transect

51 to 100 = +/- 25% of the total count for the transect

100 + = +/- 50% of the total count for the transect

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values: 000 to 999

14.5.4 MEDIUM FWD COUNT

Record the number of pieces counted in this size class (0.25 to 0.9-inch diameter) along the transect segment.

An accurate count should be conducted up to 50 pieces. If the count exceeds 50, the transect can be subsampled to estimate a total count for the transect segment (see 14.5, #6)

When collected: On the 150 degree transect in CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: +/- 20% of the total count for the transect

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values: 000 to 999

14.5.5 LARGE FWD COUNT

Record the number of pieces counted in this size class (1.0 to 2.9 inch diameter) along the transect segment.

An accurate count should be conducted up to 20 pieces. If the count exceeds 20, the transect can be subsampled to estimate a total count for the transect segment (see section 14.5, #6).

When collected: On the 150 degree transect in CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: +/- 20% of the total count for the transect

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values: 000 to 500

14.5.6 HIGH COUNT REASON

Enter a code that applies to the situation encountered on the transect. Enter a code if any of the counts on a transect are greater than 100 pieces.

When Collected: When any count on the transect >100

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values:

127

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter X DOWN WOODY MATERIALS

0

1

2

3

FWD is not unusually high

High count is due to an overall high density of FWD across the transect

Wood Rat’s nest located on transect

Tree or shrub laying across transect

14.5.7 RESIDUE PILE ON TRANSECT

Enter a code that indicates whether a residue pile intersects the FWD transect segment. The default is always

0; crews will enter a 1 if the situation is encountered on the transect.

When Collected: On all FWD transects (between 14 and 24 ft)

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values:

0 No

1 Yes

14.6 DUFF, LITTER, AND FUELBED DEPTH MEASUREMENTS

Depth measurements are sampled in accessible forest land conditions. The depth of the duff layer, litter layer, and overall fuelbed are important components of fire models used to estimate fire behavior, fire spread, fire effects, and smoke production. These measurements are taken at the 24-foot location on each transect. An average depth will be calculated in the office and stored with other information about the condition class on the plot. If a residue pile, log, rock, or other obstruction intersects the transect at the 24-ft location, do not measure the duff or litter depth.

But, do measure the fuelbed depth if the obstruction is a log or residue pile.

14.6.1 Definitions

1. Litter is the layer of freshly fallen leaves, needles, twigs (< 0.25 inch in diameter), cones, detached bark chunks, dead moss, dead lichens, detached small chunks of rotted wood, dead herbaceous stems, and flower parts (detached and not upright). Litter is the loose plant material found on the top surface of the forest floor. Little decomposition has begun in this layer.

Litter is flash fuel – so think about it as the loose material that is exposed to the air, capable of igniting quickly and carrying a fire across the surface of the forest floor.

Litter does not include bark that is still attached to a down log, or rotten chunks of wood that are still inside a decaying log or log end (i.e., if a decayed log end has a lot of rotten cubes or pieces laying on a log surface and exposed to air, they are considered part of the log and not litter – fire would burn differently if it hit a pile of rotten punky wood chips, cradled by the unrotted sapwood shell). If these rotten chunks have spilled out to the ground and are actually on the ground surface, then they would be included in the litter layer.

Litter does not include animal manure.

Microplot estimates: As you look down on the microplot, litter is the material that you see covering the surface area of the 6.8-foot radius plot.

2. Duff is the layer just below litter. It consists of decomposing leaves and other organic material. You should see no recognizable plant parts, the duff layer is usually dark decomposed organic matter. When moss is present, the top of the duff layer is just below the green portion of the moss. The bottom of this layer is the point where mineral soil (A horizon) begins.

128

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter X DOWN WOODY MATERIALS

3. The is the accumulated mass of dead, woody material on the surface of the forest floor. It begins at the top of the duff layer, and includes litter, FWD, CWD, and dead woody shrubs. In this definition, the fuelbed does not include dead hanging branches from standing trees.

14.6.2 Overview of Measurements

Depth measurements will be taken at the 24-foot (slope distance) location on each transect. If a log, rock or other obstruction occurs at the sample location, do not measure duff or litter depth, regardless of what is on top of the obstruction. However, if the obstruction is a log, proceed with the fuelbed depth estimate.

The DUFF, LITTER, AND FUELBED SAMPLE variable has three options for indicating if duff, litter, and/or fuelbed were measured at each sample location. The default value for this variable is 1, indicating that all three variables were measured (duff, litter, and fuelbed). A value of 0 is entered if duff and litter were not sampled (obstruction), but fuelbed was sampled. A value of 2 is entered if none of the three (duff, litter, and the fuelbed) were sampled

(i.e., submerged part of plot).

14.6.2.1 Duff and Litter

The duff layer is the organic material layer between the A-horizon (or uppermost soil mineral horizon) and the litter layer. The duff is a soil layer dominated by organic material derived from the decomposition of plant and animal litter (pine straw, leaves, twigs, etc) and deposited on either an organic or a mineral surface. This layer is distinguished from the litter layer in that the original organic material has undergone sufficient decomposition that the source of this material (e.g., individual plant parts) can no longer be identified. Litter is defined as undecomposed or only partially decomposed organic material that can be readily identified (e.g., plant leaves, twigs, etc.). As a general rule, duff depth should rarely exceed a few inches. Crews should be absolutely sure they are measuring deep duff depths, instead of mineral soil layers or parts of the litter layer. Duff can easily weigh more than 6 times that of litter. If unsure of the bottom of the duff layer, crews should feel the texture of the suspect material in their hand. Rub the soil between your fingers. Does it crumble (duff) or feel more like modeling clay

(mineral).

Carefully expose a shallow profile of the forest floor by digging out an area at the sample point using a knife, hatchet, or other tool. Estimate the depth of each layer with a ruler to the nearest 0.1 inch. If there is a log, rock, or other obstruction on the surface at the sample point, do not measure the litter or duff depth (record DUFF, LITTER,

AND FUELBED SAMPLE = 0 or 2, depending if fuelbed can be sampled) ; a value of 99.9 will be entered by the

TALLY program for each depth.

As you dig the hole for this measurement, if you encounter a rock, root, or buried log – stop the depth measurement at this point.

The height of the litter should be measured at the top of the loose material located at the sample point on the transect. Try to preserve the conditions of this location by walking around this point, so the QA staff will measure the same height as the original crew.

14.6.2.2 Fuelbed

Measure the height of the fuelbed from the top of the duff layer (just below the litter) to the highest piece of woody debris found at the transect point. Round to the nearest 0.1 foot. If a rock or other obstruction (other than a log) occurs at the 24.0-foot sample location, do not measure fuelbed depth.

129

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter X DOWN WOODY MATERIALS

14.6.3 SUBPLOT NUMBER

Record the code indicating the number of the subplot center from which the transect originates.

When collected: All tally segments

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values: 1 to 4 subplot subplot

3 Southeast

14.6.4 TRANSECT

Record the code indicating the azimuth of the transect.

When collected: All tally segments

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values:

030 Transect extends 30 degrees from subplot center

150 Transect extends 150 degrees from subplot center

270 Transect extends 270 degrees from subplot center

14.6.5 DUFF, LITTER, AND FUELBED SAMPLE

Record the code indicating if the depth of the duff and litter layer was measured.

When collected: At 24.0 ft on each transect

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values:

0 Duff and litter depth not sampled; Fuelbed is sampled

1 All sampled: Duff, litter, and fuelbed

2 Nothing sampled; Duff, litter, fuelbed are not sampled

14.6.6 DUFF DEPTH

Record the code indicating the depth of the duff layer to the nearest 0.1 inch.

When collected: At 24.0 ft on each transect

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: +/- 0.5 inch

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values: 00.0 to 99.9

130

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter X DOWN WOODY MATERIALS

14.6.7 LITTER DEPTH

Record the code indicating the depth of the litter layer to the nearest 0.1 inch.

When collected: At 24.0 ft on each transect

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: +/- 0.5 inch

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values: 00.0 to 99.9

14.6.8 FUELBED DEPTH

Record the code indicating the depth of the fuelbed layer, to the nearest 0.1 foot. If the fuelbed depth is >0 and

< 0.1 foot enter 0.1foot. In this situation finer depth resolution will be obtained from the duff and litter measurements.

When collected: At 24.0 ft on each transect

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: +/- 20%

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values: 00.0 to 99.9

14.7 FUEL LOADING ON THE MICROPLOT

NOTE: FUEL LOADING is available by entering “Subpl info” from the Plot Menu

Another component of the total fuel loading on a plot is the biomass of live and dead understory material. The 6.8foot radius microplot will be used to estimate the percent cover and height of live and dead shrubs, live and dead herbs (includes grasses) and litter. Fuel loading is estimated in accessible forest land conditions on the microplot.

Enter one value for all forested conditions combined.

Shrubs are plants with woody stems, including woody vines. Herbs are non-woody herbaceous plants, but also include ferns, mosses, lichens, sedges, and grasses. Although many forbs and grasses will die by the end of the growing season, an estimate of live and dead biomass on a given date will help fire modelers predict the phenology of herbaceous material during the year, allowing them to estimate fire danger patterns across the landscape.

Percent cover is estimated for each of the five fuel categories (live shrubs, dead shrubs, live herbs, dead herbs, and litter) in 10-percent classes for the accessible forested conditions of the microplot. For live fuels, estimate the percent of the microplot area that is covered by live plant material. Include whole plants that are entirely green (or alive) and the live branches on plants that are a mixture of live and dead plant parts. Include live branches or leaves that extend into the microplot area from a plant that is actually rooted outside of the microplot. Do not include herbaceous material above 6 feet (i.e., moss, ferns, lichens, epiphytes that are growing in tree branches above 6 feet).

For dead fuels, estimate the percent cover using the same procedures as live fuels, but include plants that are entirely dead and branches or leaves that are dead but still attached to a live plant. Dead plant material must be clearly visible. Do not include dead material that has fallen to the ground. Cover estimates are made by visualizing an outline around the dead material (with all ‘air’ space included) and accumulating this across the forested microplot area.

An estimate of the total height of the shrub and herbaceous layers is also needed to calculate biomass and fuel loadings. Record a height estimate for each fuel category, except litter. Height is estimated for the tallest shrub on the microplot.

131

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter X DOWN WOODY MATERIALS

Microplot Cover Estimation Guide (Hint: 8.5” x 11” = about 0.5% coverage)

% area (sq ft) radius (ft) square (ft)

10 14.52 2.15 3.81

20 29.04 3.04 5.39

30 43.56 3.72 6.60

40 58.08 4.30 7.62

50 72.60 4.81 8.52

60 87.12 5.27 9.33

70 101.64 5.69 10.08

80 116.16 6.08 10.78

90 130.68 6.45 11.43

100 145.2 6.80 12.05

14.7.1 SUBPLOT NUMBER

Record the code indicating the number of the subplot center from which the transect originates.

This code will have been entered in the chOOse subplot screen earlier, the current subplot number will be shown in the upper right corner of the “Fuel Loading” screen. Check to make sure that you are entering the correct fuels data for the correct subplot.

When collected: All microplots with at least one CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values: 1 to 4 subplot subplot subplot subplot

14.7.2 LIVE SHRUB PERCENT COVER

Record the code for the cover class that indicates the percent cover of the forested microplot area covered with live shrubs.

When collected: All microplots with at least one CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1

Field width: 2 digits

Tolerance: +/- 1 class

MQO: At least 85% of the time

Values:

00 Absent

01

10

Trace ( < 1% cover)

1 – 10%

20 11-20%

30 21-30%

….

90 81-90%

99 91-100%

132

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter X DOWN WOODY MATERIALS

14.7.3 LIVE SHRUB HEIGHT

Record the code indicating the height of the tallest shrub to the nearest 0.1 foot. Measure heights < 6 feet and estimate heights > 6 feet.

When collected: All microplots with at least one CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: +/- 0.5 ft

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values: 00.0 to 99.9

14.7.4 DEAD SHRUBS PERCENT COVER

Record the code for the cover class that indicates the percent cover of the forested microplot area covered with dead shrubs and dead branches attached to live shrubs if visible from above.

When collected: All microplots with at least one CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1

Field width: 2 digits

Tolerance: +/- 1 class

MQO: At least 85% of the time

Values:

00 Absent

01 Trace ( < 1% cover)

10 1 – 10%

20 11-20%

30 21-30%

….

90 81-90%

99 91-100%

14.7.5 DEAD SHRUB HEIGHT

Record the code indicating the height of the tallest dead shrub to the nearest 0.1 foot. Measure heights < 6 feet and estimate heights > 6 feet.

When collected: All microplots with at least one CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: +/- 0.5 ft

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values: 00.0 to 99.9

14.7.6 LIVE HERBS PERCENT COVER

Record the code for the cover class that indicates the percent cover of the forested microplot area covered with live herbaceous plants.

When collected: All microplots with at least one CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1

Field width: 2 digits

Tolerance: +/- 1 class

MQO: At least 85% of the time

Values:

00 Absent

01 Trace ( < 1% cover)

10 1 – 10%

20 11-20%

30 21-30%

….

90 81-90%

99 91-100%

133

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter X DOWN WOODY MATERIALS

14.7.7 LIVE HERBS HEIGHT

Record the code indicating the height (at the tallest point) of the live herbaceous layer to the nearest 0.1 foot.

Maximum height is 6 feet.

When collected: All microplots with at least one CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1

Field width: 2 digits

Tolerance: +/- 0.2 ft

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values: 0.0 to 6.0

14.7.8 DEAD HERBS PERCENT COVER

Record the code for the cover class that indicates the percent cover of the forested microplot area covered with dead herbaceous plants and dead leaves attached to live plants if visible from above.

When collected: All microplots with at least one CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1

Field width: 2 digits

Tolerance: +/- 1 class

MQO: At least 85% of the time

Values:

00 Absent

01 Trace ( < 1% cover)

10 1 – 10%

20 11-20%

30 21-30%

….

90 81-90%

99 91-100%

14.7.9 DEAD HERBS HEIGHT

Record the code indicating the height (at the tallest point) of the dead herbaceous layer to the nearest 0.1 foot.

Maximum height is 6 feet.

When collected: All microplots with at least one CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1

Field width: 2 digits

Tolerance: +/- 0.2 ft

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values: 0.0 to 6.0

14.7.10 LITTER PERCENT COVER

Record the code for the cover class that indicates the percent cover of the forested microplot area covered with litter. Litter is the layer of freshly fallen leaves, twigs, dead moss, dead lichens, and other fine particles of organic matter found on the surface of the forest floor. Decomposition is minimal.

When collected: All microplots with at least one CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1

Field width: 2 digits

Tolerance: +/- 1 class

MQO: At least 85% of the time

Values:

00 Absent

01 Trace ( < 1% cover)

10 1 – 10%

20 11-20%

30 21-30%

….

90 81-90%

99 91-100%

134

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter X DOWN WOODY MATERIALS

14.8 SAMPLING RESIDUE PILES

The line transect method is not practical when sampling CWD within piles and windrows. Piles and windrows will be located and sampled on the subplot plot, regardless of whether they intersect a transect.

Piles and windrows created directly by human activity and log piles at the bottom of steep-sided ravines in which individual pieces are impossible to tally separately, are more efficiently sampled by using the following instructions.

However, loose CWD in piles created by wind throw, landslides, fires, and other natural causes should be tallied using line transects unless it is physically impossible to measure the pieces in the natural pile.

For a pile to be tallied on a subplot that contains forest land, all of the following criteria must be met (Figure 14-11):

• The pile's center must be within 24.0 horizontal feet of subplot center,

• The pile's center must be in an accessible forest land condition class, and

• The pile contains pieces of CWD > 3 inches diameter that would be impossible to tally separately.

Use the PILE DENSITY variable to estimate the percent of the pile that contains woody material > 3 inches.

The pile is assigned to the condition class in which the pile center lies.

Apply the following steps to determine the center of a pile or windrow:

1. Determine the longest axis of a pile.

2. Determine the midpoint of this axis.

3. Project a line through this midpoint that is perpendicular to the axis determined in step 1.

4. Determine the midpoint of the segment of this projected line that crosses the pile.

5. This is the center of the pile.

Piles that cross the 24.0-foot fixed-radius subplot boundary: If the center of a pile is within 24.0 horizontal feet of subplot center, tally the pile, recording the dimensions of the entire pile even if part of the pile is beyond 24.0 feet.

If the center of a pile is more than 24.0 horizontal feet of subplot center, do not tally the pile or any portion of the pile.

Figure 14-11. Residue pile selection examples.

135

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter X DOWN WOODY MATERIALS

14.8.1 SUBPLOT NUMBER

Record the code indicating the subplot number.

When collected: Record for all sampled residue piles

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values: 1 to 4 subplot

2 North subplot

4 Southwest

14.8.2 CONDITION CLASS

Record the code indicating the number of the condition class to which the pile is assigned.

When collected: Record for all sampled residue piles

Field Width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 99% of the time

Values: 1 to 9

14.8.3 PILE AZIMUTH

Record the code indicating the azimuth from the subplot center to the pile. This azimuth centers on the pile so that it can be relocated. Use 360 for north.

When collected: All sampled residue piles

Field width: 3 digits

Tolerance: +/- 10

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values: 001 to 360

14.8.4 PILE SHAPE

Record the code indicating the shape of the pile. Determine which of the four shapes diagrammed in Figure

14-12 most resembles the pile and record the dimensions. Pile dimensions should be ocularly smoothed out when making estimates. Average the unevenness of protruding pieces.

When collected: All sampled residue piles

Field width: 1 digit

Tolerance: No errors

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values: 1 to 4

Figure 14-12. PILE SHAPE codes.

136

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter X DOWN WOODY MATERIALS

14.8.5 PILE LENGTH 1

Record the code indicating the length of the sides of the pile. Estimate to the nearest foot. PILE LENGTH 1 may often equal PILE LENGTH 2.

When collected: All sampled residue piles and PILE SHAPE = 2, 3, 4

Field width: 2 digits

Tolerance: +/- 10%

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values: 01 to 99

14.8.6 PILE LENGTH 2

Record the code indicating the length of the sides of the pile. Estimate to the nearest foot. PILE LENGTH 1 may often equal PILE LENGTH 2.

When collected: All sampled residue piles and PILE SHAPE = 4

Field width: 2 digits

Tolerance: +/- 10%

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values: 01 to 99

14.8.7 PILE WIDTH 1

Record the code indicating the width of the sides of the pile. Estimate to the nearest foot. PILE WIDTH 1 may often equal PILE WIDTH 2.

When collected: All sampled residue piles, and PILE SHAPE = 1, 2, 3, 4

Field width: 2 digits

Tolerance: +/- 10%

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values: 01 to 99

14.8.8 PILE WIDTH 2

Record the code indicating the width of the sides of the pile. Estimate to the nearest foot. PILE WIDTH 1 may often equal PILE WIDTH 2.

When collected: All sampled residue piles, and PILE SHAPE = 3, 4

Field width: 2 digits

Tolerance: +/- 10%

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values: 01 to 99

14.8.9 PILE HEIGHT 1

Record the code indicating the height of either end of the pile. Estimate to the nearest foot. PILE HEIGHT 1 may often equal PILE HEIGHT 2.

When collected: All sampled residue piles, and PILE SHAPE = 1, 2, 3, 4

Field width: 2 digits

Tolerance: +/- 10%

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values: 01 to 99

137

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter X DOWN WOODY MATERIALS

14.8.10 PILE HEIGHT 2

Record the code indicating the height of either end of the pile. Estimate to the nearest foot. PILE HEIGHT 1 may often equal PILE HEIGHT 2.

When collected: All sampled residue piles, and PILE SHAPE = 3, 4

Field width: 2 digits

Tolerance: +/- 10%

MQO: At least 90% of the time

Values: 01 to 99

14.8.11 PILE DENSITY

Record the code estimating the percent of the pile that consists of wood. Air, soil, rock, plants, etc, should be factored out of the estimate. Estimate to the nearest 10 percent.

When collected: All sampled residue piles

Field width: 2 digits

Tolerance: +/- 20%

MQO: At least 75% of the time

Values:

00 Absent

01 Trace ( < 1% cover)

10 1 – 10%

20 11-20%

30 21-30%

….

90 81-90%

99 91-100%

14.9 ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

Contact information for the National Advisor for this indicator is: Chris Woodall, USDA Forest Service, North Central

Research Station, 1992 Folwell Ave, St. Paul, MN 55108, cwoodall@fs.fed.us

, http:\\ncrs2.fs.fed.us\4801\DWM .

138

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter X DOWN WOODY MATERIALS

DWM DATA SHEETS

DWM Combined Data Form

Date: Plot Number: P3 Plot Number:

Transect Segment Data

Sub plot xx

Transect Condition Start Dist xxx x xxx.y (ft)

Microplot

Fuel

Loading

Sub Plot

1

2

3

4

Residue Pile Form

FWD

Form

Sub Plot

1

2

3

4

Condition x

Live

Shrub xx (%)

Sub Plot Condition Azimuth xx xx (%) xxx (deg)

0.00” -

.24”

Small xxx

Pile

Shape x

.25” - .99”

Med xxx

Height xx.y (ft)

Slope xxx (%)

Dead

Shrub xx (%)

Length 1 Length 2 xx (ft) xx (ft)

1.00” -

3.00”

Large xxx

H. Count

Reason x

End Dist xxx.y (ft)

Duff, Litter and Fuelbed Depths

Plot -

Transect

DLF

Sampled Duff

1 - 30

1 - 150

1 - 270

2 - 30

2 - 150

2 - 270

3 - 30

3 - 150

3 - 270

4 - 30

4 - 150

4 - 270 x

Height xx.y (ft)

Live Herb xx (%)

Height xx.y (ft) xx.y (in)

Dead

Herb xx (%)

Litter xx.y (in)

Height xx.y (ft)

Width 1 xx (ft)

Residue

Pile x

Width 2 xx (ft)

Microplot

Cover

0

1

20

30

40

Height 1 xx (ft)

None

Trace

11 - 20

21 - 30

31 - 40

Height 2 xx (ft)

50

60

80

90

99

Fuelbed xx.y (ft)

Litter % xx (%)

Density xx (%)

41 - 50

51 - 60

71 - 80

81 - 90

91 - 100

139

Chapter X DOWN WOODY MATERIALS

Sub Plot Transect Slp. Dist Species xx xxx xx.y (ft) xxx

Tran. Dia xxx (in)

Sm. End xxx (in)

140

Lg. End xxx (in)

Length xxx (ft)

Decay Hollow History x x x

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter XI. COORDINATES (GPS)

XI. COORDINATES (GPS)

A. Overview

An objective of the inventory is to obtain accurate GPS coordinates for each field grid location. Coordinates are used to correlate plot information with remotely sensed imagery and data and in relocating the plot at future inventories. For the collection of GPS coordinates- Alaska PNW-FIA uses Magellan SporTrak Pro GPS receivers.

B. When and where to collect readings

For each plot visited, collect a GPS reading that has averaged for at least 3 minutes with an EPE (estimated position error) of 70 feet or less. Try to collect an adequate set of readings as soon as the center of subplot 1 is located. If unsuccessful, try again shortly before going to the next subplot. Success is GPS-generated coordinates based on a reading that has averaged for at least 3 minutes with < 70 feet EPE.

If unsuccessful at the field grid location, try to obtain coordinates at a different location. NOTE: Allow at least 45 min to an hour between readings to allow for different or new satellites to come into clear view of the receiver. If more than one coordinate is collected, record the coordinate that is closest to subplot 1 center and has averaged for at least 3 minutes. Write any other collected GPS coordinates or any notes regarding GPS use on the front of the location record. Record the azimuth and distance from the GPS reading location to the center of subplot 1.

C. Recording GPS information

GPS information is recorded in the field data recorder (See GPS INFO in the PLOT LEVEL DATA section of manual). The following info is put in the data recorder:

GPS LOCATION TYPE (Code = #)

GPS UNIT TYPE (Unit = 2)

GPS SERIAL NUMBER (######, located under GPS screen)

COODINATE SYSTEM (Sys = 1)

LATITUDE DEGREES- (##)

LATITUDE MINUTES- (#####)

LONGITUDE DEGREES- (###)

LONGITUDE MINUTES- (#####)

NUMBER OF READINGS (Read = ###)

GPS ERROR (Error = ###)

GPS ELEVATION (Elev. = #####)

AZIMUTH TO PLOT CENTER (Azm = ###) if coordinates collected at PC enter 000.

DISTANCE TO PLOT CENTER (Dist = ###) if coordinates collected at PC enter 000.

** Important Note** The data recorder requires that the number of averaged readings be entered. The

Magellan unit does not have a number of readings counter, instead it utilizes a timer. The timer is displayed on the position screen. It displays in hours/minutes/and seconds. The GPS receiver collects one reading per second while averaging. To correctly enter the number of readings in the husky, the time in minutes and seconds must be converted to number of readings. Since the unit collects 60 readings per minute of averaging crews must remember to multiply the number of minutes by 60 and then add the number of seconds shown to that figure. For example, if the Magellan receiver averages for three minutes and twelve seconds it will display 00:03:12. To convert this to number of readings multiply three minutes by sixty and add twelve. 3 X 60 = 180 + 12 = 192. Crews would enter 192 in the husky data recorder for

Number of Readings.

D. GPS keypad layout and commands

GPS keypad commands

PWR: (lightbulb) power key turns the unit on and off. To turn the unit on, hit the PWR key, then the ENTER key

ENTER: (arrow) confirms data entry or menu selections

MENU: ( book ) provides access to waypoint and setup functions

ESC : (circled x) cancels the operation of the last button pressed

141

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter XI. COORDINATES (GPS)

NAV: (sphere) accesses the various navigation screens

GOTO: (stick ma n) creates a direct route to any waypoint stored in memory, and is used to MARK a position

IN: (+magnify glass) zooms in the display of the map screen

OUT: (--magnify glass ) zooms out the display of the map screen

LEFT/RIGHT arrow keys move the cursor left or right while entering data

UP/DOWN arrow keys move the cursor up and down while entering data or selecting menu options

Initiate screen backlight: press and hold the PWR key for 2 seconds.

The backlight quickly drains the batteries, so avoid accidentally turning on the backlight.

Note: Adjust screen backlight: after turning the screen backlight on, press and hold the PWR key for 2 seconds. This will increase the strength of the backlight. Press and hold the PWR key for 2 seconds again to turn the backlight off.

E. GPS setup options

Listed below are the parameters to be set up before collecting satellite readings. Once these parameters are set up for the first time they will not need to be reset. Periodically (at least weekly) the unit should be checked to see that the settings have not been inadvertently changed.

NAVIGATION SCREENS

The SporTrak has seven navigation screens that can be displayed or turned off. Some screens must be displayed in order to get coordinate information. Several screen display similar or the same information and it is recommended that these screens not be displayed.

142

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter XI. COORDINATES (GPS)

Turn the unit on and press NAV until the map screen appears. Press MENU and select Setup by scrolling down until it is highlighted and press the ENTER key. Select Nav Screens by scrolling down.

Sat =

Compass =

On

On

Large On

Position

Road = Off

SETUP UNITS

Press MENU key, use up or down arrow to select Setup option, then press the ENTER key to enter the Setup pages. To scroll through the following pages use the up/down arrows. Once the desired Setup menu option is highlighted, press the ENTER key to select it.

COORDINATE

MAP DATUM : Primary = NAD83

MODE

TIME

; 3D

FORMAT ; Local AM/PM, Done

NAV : Miles/Ft/MPH

NORTH : Magnetic

DAYLIGHT : United States

POWER OFF TIMER : On/Time/30 minutes

LIGHT : 4 Minutes

BEEPER : Off

IMPORTANT: Make sure that the MAP DATUM being used is the correct DATUM specified for your area.

This is set on the SETUP page. Using a different datum will alter the coordinates significantly.

CUSTOMIZING NAVIGATION SCREENS

It is important that navigation screens are setup consistently among all units.

Large Data Screen (see picture below):

Press NAV until the Large Data screen displays. Press MENU and select Customize. Press ENTER and select

BEARING and press ENTER. Press ENTER and select DISTANCE press ENTER. Press ENTER and select

HEADING press ENTER. Press ENTER and select SPEED press ENTER.

Position Screen (see picture, next page):

Press NAV until the Position screen displays. Press MENU, scroll down until Customize is highlighted, press

ENTER. Press ENTER, scroll down and highlight EPE (estimated position error), press ENTER. Now the EPE will still be displayed while the unit is averaging. Monitor EPE to ensure that readings are not taken at > 70 feet.

F. Operating the GPS on plot

Carry extra batteries at all times. The two AA-alkaline batteries begin to lose power after approximately eight hours of use. See Section K. Batteries, for more details.

1. Turn on the GPS unit

2. Check to see if the unit is receiving satellite readings by pressing the NAV key until the satellite status screen is visible. The satellite status screen shows 2 circles at the top of the screen, and the

143

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter XI. COORDINATES (GPS) horizontal battery status bar at the bottom. If there are 4 vertical black bars below the 2 circles and above the battery status bar, then the unit is receiving enough satellites to calculate your position.

3. When the unit has locked onto 4 satellites, push the NAV key until the Position Screen is displayed. The

Position Screen shows the current coordinates and elevation at the top of the screen. The date, time, and position error are shown in the center of the screen. If the GPS unit is not receiving satellites, the position error will show “Search”, and the coordinates shown at the top of the screen will be the last location where the unit was able to lock onto 4 satellites.

4. In the Position Screen, the EPE (estimated position error) is displayed just above the trip odometer (In the place of HEADING on the picture below). The GPS receiver will enter averaging mode anytime it is stationary. To ensure that only readings at plot center are averaged, from several feet away, slowly move the unit onto plot center and let it remain stationary in averaging mode for at least three minutes.

Position Screen

5. Mark and Label the waypoint as described in section H. Waypoints (below)

6. Record the coordinates (lat/long), elevation, number of readings, etc under Plot Level Data ( GPS Info ) in the data recorder. If the coordinates are recorded at plot center, then azimuth and distance to plot center will be recorded as zero.

G. Collecting coordinates away from plot center

If you can’t get an adequate set of readings at plot center, you may take readings at another location, and then record the azimuth and distance to plot center so that someone in the office can calculate the coordinates at plot center. Take the GPS unit to a location where you will be able to collect 3 minutes of averaged readings at < 70ft accuracy, and where you will be able to accurately measure the horizontal distance, azimuth and slope in degrees to plot center. Do not move to a distance more than 200ft away if you don’t have a laser range finder.

144

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter XI. COORDINATES (GPS)

Record the coordinates, elevation, number of readings, azimuth, and distance to plot center under Plot Data in the data recorder.

H. Waypoints

Creating a waypoint (when coordinates are given)

A waypoint is a fairly precise location that a GPS user may assign a number and/or label to identify. For Alaska

PNW-FIA the location format is Latitude/Longitude. This format requires this information: Lat degrees - a 2 digit number and Lat minutes – a 5-digit number. Long degrees – a 3 digit number and Long minutes – a 5-digit number.

To create a new waypoint with given coordinates from existing plot data, turn on the GPS and then hold down the

GOTO button. This will bring up the MARK screen with SAVE highlighted. Push either the up or down arrow until the Location field is highlighted. Press ENTER. Highlight Latitude and press ENTER. Edit line 1 of the location field by press the up or down arrow until the desired digit is displayed, then press the right arrow to move to the next digit. When the coordinates are displayed, press ENTER. Edit line 2 of the location field in the same manner, and press ENTER. Edit the Elevation field in the same manner, and press ENTER. If you need to edit the icon, name, or message for a waypoint, use the UP/DOWN arrows to highlight the field you wish to change and press

ENTER. You are then placed in the edit mode. Use the arrow and ENTER keys to select the icons or letters you wish to use. In naming the waypoint, add the letters NAV when using given coordinates from the folder data

-to distinguish from real-on-the- ground collected GPS points. After you are finished changing the name or message, highlight the OK button and press ENTER to return to the MARK screen

When you have entered all the necessary data, highlight the Save button, and press ENTER. (To navigate to a newly created waypoint –see section I.)

Marking (storing) your current location

Storing the location of a vehicle, RP, or starting point is a good example on how you can use this feature in the field. Stored waypoints can be useful in approaching locations in a different way, taking a different route back to the RP, or if you should get lost (see navigating to a waypoint).

To start, make sure the unit is on and you are receiving good signals. Check the Position screen (see Section F.

Operating the GPS) and be sure that you are getting readings from at least 4 satellites. Wait until the EPE

(estimated position error) is 70 feet or less. Allow it to collect readings for at least 3 minutes

Push the GOTO button and hold it down until the. MARK screen appears. You can now select a name to assign as a waypoint for your current location. Push the UP/DOWN arrows until “name” is highlighted, then press ENTER.

Use the arrow and ENTER keys to select the letters or symbols you wish to use. After you are finished changing the name highlight the OK button and press ENTER to return to the MARK screen. Scroll down and highlight the save button and press enter.

The GPS’s current location (under the assigned name), is now stored in its memory and can be used to navigate with.

Naming the GPS Waypoints

The Magellan waypoint name allows us up to 8 numbers/letters/symbols.

The first five digits of the name should be the plot number (on the folder). (ex. if the plot number is 30 then plot number is 00030). The next 2-3 digits would be LZ, TR, RP, PC, SP2, SP3, SP4, or OTH.

LZ / TR = landing zone, or truck parking spot

RP = Reference Point

PC = Plot Center

SP2 = Subplot 2

SP3 = Subplot 3

SP4 = Subplot 4

OTH = Other, describe in GPS notes/location record

145

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter XI. COORDINATES (GPS)

I. Navigating with the GPS

To begin navigation, you must first have a waypoint stored in the GPS unit (see Section H. Waypoints). A compass will be needed. ( NOTE: keep the compass away from the body of the GPS to keep it from affecting the magnetic accuracy). Once you know which waypoint number you are going to travel towards, turn the GPS on and then, after the unit has locked onto 4 satellites, push the GOTO button. Highlight “ User ” in the menu, and press the right or left arrow buttons until “Alphabetical” shows in the field under FIND BY at the bottom of the screen. Press the

ENTER button. A list of user-stored waypoints appears. Scroll down through the list until you find the name or number of the desired waypoint. (For example: a NAV waypoint as created in Section H) Highlight the desired waypoint and press ENTER.

If you are not getting satellite signals then you will get the bearing and distance to the waypoint you selected from the last position the GPS unit obtained satellite signals. You may want to move in the general direction of the waypoint and hope that satellites will come into better view, or you may want to let the GPS sit for a few minutes to lock on to some signals.

Once you are sure you are receiving satellites you can press the NAV button to find the Large Data screen. This screen displays the bearing (azimuth) and distance to the waypoint and also the heading and speed of the GPS receiver. Follow the bearing using a compass, as you walk towards the waypoint and the distance should steadily decrease. Eventually, as you get closer to the waypoint, the distance will get very small (about 10-30ft), and the bearing will begin to jump around dramatically. This means that you are very close to your destination (so look for the stake and witness trees if the waypoint is subplot 1).

Other data you might see on the navigation screens:

Bearing This is the direction to your destination from your present position, in degrees, from North.

Distanc e This is distance (measured in the Nav Units selected in Setup) to your destination.

Heading This is the direction you are moving (measured in degrees). When the heading and bearing are the same, you are traveling on a direct line to your destination.

Speed This is the rate that you are traveling. The unit of measure is selected in Setup - Nav Units.

K. Batteries

GPS machines use two AA batteries, which usually last for eight hours of use. Replace the batteries when the

Power Indicator (found on the bottom of the satellite locator screen) is low. The GPS may have trouble locating satellites if the battery is low.

146

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter XII LASER 200 INSTRUCTIONS

XII. LASER 200 INSTRUCTIONS

A. Overview

Accurate heights are necessary in our inventory in order to determine volume and for other uses. The Laser can be used to get fast and accurate tree heights. It can also be used to measure distances and % slope. This instrument is more fragile than the GPS units. Some precautions must be taken with the Lasers to keep them working properly. These are:

1. Never look at the sun through the scope. Looking directly at the sun can permanently damage your eyes.

2. Never point the Laser directly at the sun. Exposing the lens system to direct sunlight, even for a brief period, may permanently damage the laser transmitter.

3. Do not expose the Laser to extreme temperatures. It is rated for a temperature range of -22 to +140 deg.

F. Don’t leave the instrument in the vehicle during the heat of the day.

4. Do not use batteries with “voltage check” features built on the batteries. The battery case of the Laser is too narrow for these batteries, and they could get stuck in the instrument.

5. Do not drop the Laser. Immediately return it to it’s case when you are finished using it.

B. Basic operation

All directions for using the Laser buttons are given assuming you are holding the instrument with the LCD display screen facing you and the 2 round lenses are facing the object you want to measure. The buttons will be referred to as:

L1

L2

L3 the left button closest to you the left button in the middle the left button furthest away from you

R1

R2 the right button closest to you the right button in the middle

R3 the right button furthest away from you

Turn the Laser on by pushing L1 or R1

Turn it off by pushing L2 and L3 at the same time. The Laser may turn itself off after a period of inactivity. Once the instrument is on, push the R1 button to make the red dot appear in the sighting scope. If there is no red sighting dot, repeatedly push the L2 button until the red dot appears and is the correct brightness.

To light up the display screen, press L3. Press L3 again to turn off the light.

C. Settings

Make sure the settings are correct before using the Laser. To set the correct measurement units, go into the main menu and:

1. Press R2 or R3 to scroll through the menu until SYS is displayed in the upper right hand corner of the screen.

2. Press R1. ON or OFF will show in the center of the screen. FILTER will flash at the bottom.

3. Press R2 until OFFSET is flashing. The number displayed should be 0000.00.

4. Press R2 until PIVOT is flashing. The number displayed should be 0000.59. When this number is set at

0.00, the Laser is set to calculate heights using a tripod attached to the center of the instrument. The pivot point is the center of the Laser. We use the pivot value at 0.59 because this sets the pivot point at the rear of the instrument, and this allows you to shoot a height while using your head as the pivot point. To change this number, press L1 until the number you want to change is flashing. Press L2 or L3 until the correct number is showing. When the number is set at 0000.59, press R1.

5. Press R2 until UNITS is flashing. Select F (feet) using the R1 button.

6. Press R2 again and D (degrees) should be flashing. If not, press R1 to toggle on D.

7. Press R2 again and % should be flashing. It should say ON. If not, press R1.

8. Press R3 twice to accept the new settings and back out to the main display.

D. Filter and Reflectors

When you are working in areas of dense brush, you need to make sure the Laser is giving you the distance to the correct target. The best way to do this is to use a reflector as a target and use the filter option on the Laser. The

Laser will only lock onto the highly reflective targets and ignore the less reflective brush. To use the filter option:

147

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter XII LASER 200 INSTRUCTIONS

1. Place a reflector (or have someone hold it) on the tree where it can be seen from the required distance. The

Laser will not work in the filter mode without a reflector as a target.

2. Go to the main menu on the Laser and push R2 or R3 until SYS is displayed on the screen.

3. Press R1 to select the SYS option. The FILTER option will blink, and it will say the FILTER is OFF or ON.

4. Push R1 to toggle FILTER between ON and OFF.

5. Press R3 to save the desired setting and to back out into the main display. When the FILTER is on, FILTER will appear at the bottom of the screen when the Laser is measuring distances.

E. Distances and % slope

Horizontal distance (HD): Turn the Laser on. The top-middle of the LCD screen will say HD. Point the red sighting dot at the target. Press R1 and hold it down until the Laser locks on the target, then release. You can tell when the instrument locks onto it’s target by sound. It buzzes while it is searching for the target, then beeps when it locks on to a target or there is an error. If you get an error message, simply aim again and press R1.

Slope distance (SD) and Vertical distance (VD): Push R2 or R3 until the correct display is shown. Then aim and press R1 until the Laser locks on target. Or, measure a horizontal distance, then push R2 until the correct display is shown.

% slope: Press R2 or R3 until INC is displayed. Then aim and press R1.

F. Tree heights

The best way to measure a tree height is to make sure you have a clear shot at the leader or a clear shot of the tree trunk. Make sure you are getting a distance to the tree trunk, and not some branches in front of it. If you can’t get a clear shot at the leader or the tree trunk, use a reflector (see section D). Once you are in position with your target in sight, go to the main menu:

1. Push R2 or R3 until HT is displayed in the upper left of the screen.

2. Push R1 once, aim at the target, then push R1 until the Laser locks on target. This will measure the horizontal distance.

3. The down arrow will flash. Aim at the base of the tree and push R1 to get the % slope.

4. The up arrow will flash. Aim at the top of the tree and push R1 again to get another % slope.

5. Press R1 once more and the Laser will display the height. Make sure this height is reasonable before recording it in the Husky.

148

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter XIII APPENDICES

XIII. APPENDICES

Table of Contents

Appendix 1--Radio Information…………………………………….150

Appendix 2--Metric Equivalents……………………………………157

Appendix 3--Slope Correction Table………………………………159

Appendix 4--Determination of Stocking

Values for Land Use Classification………………...161

Appendix 5--Glossary………………………………………………...165

Appendix 6--Cubic Foot Volume Table……………………………169

Appendix 7--Forms……………………………………………………171

149

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter XIII APPENDICES

5

6

7

2

3

4

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

Phone Type

Appendix 1-- Radio Information

Radio communications for the 2004 season will be more complex than previous seasons. Since our area of coverage extends from Ketchikan to the Kenai Penninsula, it is very important that crew leaders keep up to date with the frequencies (by group) that are available in the immediate vicinity of the boat. There will be briefings

(usually daily) discuussing radio (repeater) coverage information, it is important that all personnel be trained up in radio usage and that everyone keep track of current radio (repeater) coverage. REMEMBER: if radio communication is not possible, then the satellite phone is a good alternative.

To change groups in the radio do the following: press # , then 01 (for group 01, insert group number that is to become active), then ENT. Verify by looking at the LCD screen (under the plastic cover)

Use the Table Below for any special frequencies or any other specific user information that you want to track

Also, a table for individual use, has been added to track important phone numbers, misc contacts, etc.

The next page includes maps and frequency lists for all the channel groups that will be pre-installed on the field going radios.

GROUP #

Channel RX Freq

1

TX Freq TX CG Repeater

Phone Number Person

150

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter XIII APPENDICES

1

61

2

USCG SITES

SITE NAME Latitude Longitude

SITKA

SITE NAME Latitude

Elevation

Longitude (meters AMSL)

3

5

11

7

6

8

3

10

2

4

13

14

9

15

1

12

AKWE MOUNTAIN 059' 20' 15"N

AUKE MOUNTAIN 058' 23' 33"N

138' 53' 17"W

134' 42' 54"W

821

556

BEEZAR 057' 37' 00"N 133' 28' 00"W 1219

BIORKA ISLAND 056' 51' 09"N

MOORE MOUNTAIN 057' 35' 06"N

MOUNT FURUHELM 057' 00' 45"N

MOUNTAIN LAKE 059' 40' 51"N

MUD BAY 057' 09' 06"N

NEKA 058' 06' 06"N

NORTH KRUZOF 057' 16' 33"N

SEAL MOUNTAIN 057' 58' 48"N

135' 31' 44"W

135' 12' 06"W

134' 59' 18"W

139' 23' 06"W

TAKU INLET 058' 14' 54"N

WILLIAM HENRY 058' 44' 36"N

WINDFALL MTN. 057' 45' 06"N

135' 38' 48"W

135' 47' 15"W

135' 46' 36"W

135' 13' 15"W

STEELHEAD MTN. 057' 47' 45"N 135' 58' 48"W

134' 10' 18"W

135' 17' 15"W

134' 13' 48"W

61

849

1569

836

284

960

606

967

744

1017

1019

970

58

11

KETCHIKAN ZONE Elevation

SITE NAME Latitude Longitude (meters AMSL) 12

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

BLACK MOUNTAIN 055' 16' 45"N 131' 24' 00"W

BOCA DE QUADRA 055' 14' 47"N 130' 30' 16"W

BURNETT MTN 055' 46' 36"N

HIGH MOUNTAIN 055' 21' 45"N

132' 07' 33"W

131' 47' 59"W

ORCHARD MTN. 055' 50' 30"N 131' 21' 03"W

POLK INLET

PUNCHBOWL

055' 22' 27"N 132' 33' 12"W

055' 30' 48"N

RED BAY 056' 13' 03"N

130' 49' 54"W

SUNNA HAE 055' 27' 48"N

133' 22' 39"W

133' 04' 59"W

THORNE BAY HILL 055' 46' 54"N 132' 43' 36"W

TWELEVEMILE 055' 18' 51"N 132' 47' 30"W

TWINPEAK

BOKAN MT.

055' 45' 48"N

054' 54' 57"N

133' 10' 00"W

604

1297

818

728

1063

848

938

851

820

662

667

776

132' 09' 14"W 762

20

22

19

18

16

17

21

PETERSBURG

SITE NAME

Elevation

Latitude

ELBOW 056' 42' 24"N

Longitude (meters AMSL)

ETOLIN 056' 08' 32"N

FARRAGUT 057' 07' 24"N

FOOLS 056' 12' 54"N

KUIU

LINDENBERG

TYEE

056' 35' 18"N

056' 44' 36"N

056' 12' 07"N

131' 53' 02"W

132' 37' 12"W

133' 02' 48"W

131' 58' 33"W

133' 59' 48"W

133 '04 '54"W

131' 26' 43"W

1140

881

1079

915

875

934

1213

14

6

5

57

15

9

54

7

59

16

10

4

56

30

34

13

32

19

55

22

58

56

51

52

60

54

57

59

53

50

61

55

ALTHORP PEAK 058' 05' 36"N

CAPE FANSHAW 057' 12' 22"N

136' 24' 46"W

133' 28' 07"W

DUKE ISLAND 054' 52' 40"N 131' 22' 35"W

GRAVINA 055' 21' 45"N

JUNEAU 058' 18' 05"N

MT. McAUTHUR 056' 04' 55"N

MUD BAY 057' 09' 06"N

ROBERT BARRON 058' 13' 38"N

SHOAL COVE 055' 26' 26"N

SUKKAWAN ISLAND 055' 06' 36"N

YAKUTAT 058' 32' 42"N

131' 47' 59"W

134' 25' 07"W

134' 11' 09"W

135' 38' 48"W

134' 50' 21"W

131' 15' 25"W

132' 46' 22"W

139' 43' 41"W

ZAREMBO ISLAND 056' 20' 45"N 132' 51' 35"W

25

20

21

27

31

Forest Service Sites

Coast Guard Sites

33

50

28

26

52 23

53 29

24

35

51

REVISED 08/04/03 C. Marshall, USFS

151

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter XIII APPENDICES

CHANNEL GROUP 1 SITKA/HOONAH AREA

GROUP DISPLAY NAME SIT/HNH

Channel Receive RXCG Transmit TXCG NAME

CH1 163.100 163.100

CH2 168.675 171.475

CH3

CH4

169.100

168.725

0.0 169.100 141.3 N KRUZOF

0.0 168.725 141.3 MUD BAY

CH5 168.725 0.0 171.575 123.0 NEKA

CH6 168.725 171.575

CH7 168.725 171.575

NB/WB

NB

NB

NB

CH8 168.675 171.475

CH9 168.675 0.0 171.475 123.0 MOORE MT NB

CH12 168.725

171.475

170.125

0.0 171.575 100.0 ROBERT B NB

0.0 0.0

156.800

157.100

156.500

CHANNEL GROUP 2 JUNEAU AREA

GROUP DISPLAY NAME JUNEAU

CH1 163.100 163.100

CH2 169.100 170.150

CH3 170.150 0.0 169.100 88.5 AUKE MT

CH4 169.100 170.150

CH14

NB

CH5 169.100 170.150

CH6 168.725 171.575

CH7 169.100 170.150

CH8 169.100 170.150

CH9 168.675 0.0 171.475 123.0 MOORE MT NB

CH12 168.725

171.475

170.125

0.0 171.575 100.0 ROBERT B NB

156.800

0.0 0.0

0.0 156.800 0.0 MARINE16

157.100

0.0

WB

152

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter XIII APPENDICES

GROUP 3 YAKUTAT AREA

GROUP DISPLAY NAME YAKUTAT

CH1 163.100 163.100

CH2 169.100 0.0 169.100 123.0 YRD LCL

CH3 169.100 170.150

CH4

CH5

169.100

166.750

0.0 170.150 82.5 MT LAKE

0.0 168.575 100.0 DRY BAY

CH6 166.300 168.225

CH7

CH8

166.900

155.160

0.0

0.0

164.750

155.160

100.0 ICY BAY

0.0 YAK EMS

CH9 154.160 154.160

CH10 155.400 0.0 150.775 100.0 YAK 911

170.125

170.150

0.0 0.0

156.800

157.100

156.500

GROUP 4 STIKINE AREA

GROUP DISPLAY NAME

STIKINE

PETERSBURG AREA

PETERSB

CH1 169.175 169.175

CH2 169.875 169.875

CH3

CH4

169.175

169.175

0.0 169.900 103.5 ETOLIN

0.0 169.900 110.9 KUIU

CH5 169.175 169.900

CH6 169.175 169.900

CH7 169.175 0.0 169.900 146.2 ELBOW

CH8 169.175 169.900

CH9 169.125 0.0 168.175 136.5 RED BAY

168.150

171.475

168.650

0.0 0.0

156.800

156.425

0.0

NB

NB

NB

NB

NB

NB

NB

NB

WB

WB

153

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter XIII APPENDICES

GROUP 5 KETCHIKAN POW AREA

GROUP DISPLAY NAME KET POW

CH1 169.125 169.125

CH2

CH3

CH4

169.125

169.125

169.125

0.0

0.0

0.0

168.175

168.175

168.175

114.8 12 MILE

123.0 TWIN PKS

136.5 RED BAY

NB

NB

NB

CH5 169.125 168.175

CH6 169.125 168.175

CH7 169.125 168.175

CH8 169.125 168.175

CH9 169.150 0.0 169.150 100.0 REV LCL

CH11

NB

163.100

168.150

0.0 163.100 0.0 CREW NET NB

156.800

157.100

156.300

GROUP 6

GROUP NAME

0.0 0.0

0.0 0.0

KETCHIKAN REVILLA AREA

KET/REV

CH1 169.150 0.0 169.150 100.0 REV LCL

CH2 169.150 168.150

CH3 169.150 168.150

CH4 169.150 168.150

CH5 169.150 168.150

CH6

CH7

169.150

169.150

0.0 168.150 167.9 HIGH MTN NB

0.0 168.150 186.2 BLACK MTN NB

CH8 169.150 168.150

NB

CH9 169.125 169.125

CH10 169.125 0.0 168.175 123.0 TWIN PKS

CH11

NB

163.100 0.0 163.100 0.0 CREW NET NB

156.800

157.100

156.600

0.0 0.0

0.0 WX-8

154

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter XIII APPENDICES

CHANNEL GROUP 7 CHUGACH AREA

GROUP NAME CHUGACH

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH5

169.175

169.175

169.175

169.175

169.175

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

169.175

169.975

169.975

169.975

169.975

0.0 CH 1

110.9 CH 2

123.0 CH 3

131.8 CH 4

136.5 CH 5

CH6

CH7

CH8

CH9

169.175

169.175

169.175

169.125

0.0

0.0

0.0

169.975

169.975

169.975

146.2 CH 6

156.7 CH 7

167.9 CH 8

NB

NB

NB

0.0 169.125 0.0 CREW NET NB

0.0 0.0

NB

NB

NB

NB

NB

156.800

157.100

CH13 EMPTY

CH14 EMPTY

CH15 EMPTY

CH16 EMPTY

CHANNEL GROUP 8 MARINE CHANNELS

GROUP DISPLAY NAME MARINE

CH 1

CH 2

156.800

157.100

0.0

0.0

156.800

157.100

0.0 MARINE16

0.0 MARINE22

WB

WB

CH 3

CH 4

CH 5

CH 6

CH 7

CH 8

CH 9

156.050

156.300

156.350

156.450

156.500

156.600

156.650

0.0

0.0

0.0 156.350

0.0 156.450

0.0

0.0

0.0

156.050

156.300

156.500

156.600

156.650

0.0 MARINE01

0.0 MARINE06

0.0 MARINE07

0.0 MARINE09

0.0 MARINE10

0.0 MARINE12

0.0 MARINE13

WB

WB

WB

WB

WB

WB

WB

156.375

156.425

156.475

156.575

156.625

0.0 0.0

0.0 WX-2

155

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter XIII APPENDICES

CHANNEL GROUP 14 SITKA/HOONAH AREA OLD

GROUP DISPLAY NAME SIT/HNH

Channel Receive RXCG Transmit TXCG NAME

CH1 163.100 163.100

CH2 168.675 171.475

CH3

CH4

169.100

168.725

0.0 169.100 141.3 N KRUZOF

0.0 168.725 141.3 MUD BAY

CH5 168.725 0.0 171.575 123.0 NEKA

CH6 168.725 171.575

CH7 168.725 171.575

NB/WB

NB

NB

NB

CH8 168.675 168.675

CH9 168.675 0.0 171.475 123.0 MOORE MT NB

CH12 168.725

171.475

170.125

0.0 171.575 100.0 ROBERT B NB

0.0 0.0

156.800

157.100

156.500

GROUP DISPLAY NAME KET POW

CHANNEL GROUP 15 KETCHIKAN POW AREA OLD

CH1 169.125 169.125

CH2

CH3

169.125

169.125

0.0 169.875 114.8 12 MILE

0.0 169.925 123.0 TWIN PKS

WB

WB

WB CH4 169.125 0.0 169.975 136.5 RED BAY

CH5 169.125 168.175

CH6 169.125 168.175

CH7 169.125 168.175

CH8 169.125 168.175

CH9

CH11

169.150

163.100

0.0 169.150 100.0 REV LCL

168.150

0.0 163.100

NB

0.0 CREW NET WB

156.800

157.100

156.300

0.0 0.0

0.0 WX-2

156

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter XIII APPENDICES

Appendix 2 -- Metric Equivalents

Length

1 inch = 2.54 centimeters (cm.)

0.1

1 foot = 0.3048 meter (m.)

1 mile = 1.609 kilometers (km.)

1 centimeter (cm.) = .03 foot (ft.)

1 meter (m.) = 3.2808 feet (ft.)

Area

1 acre = 0.4 hectare (ha.) (approximately)

5 acres = 2 hectares (ha.) (approximately)

1,000 acres = 404.7 hectares (ha.)

1 hectare = 2.471 acres (ac.)

2.5 hectares = 6 acres (ac.) (approximately)

Volume

1,000 cubic feet = 28.3 meters (m 3 )

1 cubic foot per acre = 0.07 cubic meter per hectare (m 3 /ha)

Condition class minimum area

0.4 hectares (1 acre) = 4,000 square meters

= 40 meters x 100 meters

= 35 meter radius circle

1 acre = 118 foot radius circle

= 209 feet x 209 feet

Basal Area Factor

Metric units: each selected tree represents XX square meters of basal area per hectare

English units: each selected tree represents XX square feet of basal area per acre.

Metric

15

7

30

4.59

30.5

6.88

Metric System-length

1 meter = 10 decimeters (dm.)

1 meter = 100 centimeters (cm.)

1 meter = 1,000 millimeters (mm.) and:

157

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter XIII APPENDICES

Scale

1:15,840

1:24,000

1:31,680

1:40,000

.001 meters = 1 millimeter

.01 meters = 1 centimeter

.1 meters = 1 decimeter

1 meter = 1 meter

10 meters = 1 decameter

100 meters = 1 hectometer

1,000 meters = 1 kilometer

Photo Scales

Length on Photo

1 mm.

1 mm.

1 mm.

1 mm.

Length on Ground

15.8 meters

24.0 meters

31.7 meters

40.0 meters

0.1

1:15,840 1 inch 1,320 feet

132

.05 inch (1/20) 66 feet

0.1

1:24,000 1 inch 2,000 feet

200

.05 inch (1/20) 100 feet

0.1

1:31,680 1 inch 2,640 feet

264

.05 inch (1/20) 132 feet

0.1

1:40,000 1 inch 3,333 feet

333

.05 inch (1/20) 166 feet

158

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter XIII APPENDICES

Appendix 3-- Slope Correction Table

EXPANSION

EXPANSION FACTOR DISTANCE-

PERCENT FACTOR RECIPROCAL 24.0 ft. 100 ft.

159

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter XIII APPENDICES

Appendix 4-- Determination of Stocking Values for Land Use

Classification

Stocking values are required to determine if a CONDITION STATUS = 1 (accessible forest land) exists on a plot. This will determine which data items must be recorded for the condition. When the CONDITION

STATUS is in question (usually a nonforest area that is in the process of reverting to forest land or a marginal site that can only support a low number of trees), the crew must determine if there is sufficient stocking to classify the condition as forest. A minimum stocking value of 10 percent is required for accessible forest land (unless the condition was previously forested, such as a recent clear cut).

The following tables show the stocking values to assign to trees to determine if a plot meets the minimum stocking to be considered forest land. In the determination of stocking for this purpose, the field crew should consider the condition over its entire area, not just the trees and seedlings that would be tallied on the subplots and microplots, especially when the plot straddles conditions. Also, for stocking purposes, consider a clump of trees (e.g., stump sprouts) less than 5 inches DBH to be a single tree.

Observe all of the trees on the plot and classify the condition, based on the tree with the largest DBH, into one of the following groups; the largest tree observed has a DBH of 5 inches or greater, 4.0-4.9 inches,

3.0-3.9 inches, 2.0-2.9 inches, 1.0-1.9 inches or less than 1.0 inch DBH. If you are using the Stocking

Values table to determine if the condition meets minimum stocking, use tables 5a and 5b (below).

When using a Stocking Values table, begin a tally of each subplot and microplot and sum the stocking values for each tree tallied based upon its species and size class. When the stocking values for the tallied trees equals or exceeds 10, the condition meets the minimum stocking requirement for forest land.

For example, a condition that was formerly nonforest is no longer being maintained as nonforest and has begun to revert. A check of all four subplots and microplots confirms that the largest tree there is in the

3.0 – 3.9 inches DBH class. The tally of microplot 1 is one white spruce (species code = 094) seedling.

The sum of the stocking value (table 5a) to this point is 1.8 and the tally continues on microplot 2.

Subplot

Number

Plot Type Species Size Class Number

Tallied

Stocking

Value

1 2 094 1 1.8

Total 1.8

The tally at microplot 2 is two white spruce seedlings. The stocking value for the two seedlings is 3.6.

The cumulative stocking value to this point is 5.4. Since the minimum value of 10 percent stocking has not been reached, the tally continues to subplot 3.

Subplot

Number

Plot Type Species Size Class Number

Tallied

Stocking

Value

1 2 094

2 2 094

1.0

1.0 2 3.6

Total 5.4

161

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter XIII APPENDICES

At microplot 3 two white spruce (species code = 318) saplings in the 1.0 – 1.9-inch DBH class is tallied.

The cumulative stocking value is now 12.8 and the condition meets the minimum stocking to be considered forest land.

Subplot

Number

Plot Type Species Size Class Number

Tallied

Stocking

Value

1 2 094

2 2 094

3 2 094

1.0

1.0

1.0 – 1.9 2 7.4

Total 12.8

When trees of more than one diameter class are present, their contribution towards meeting the minimum must be combined. For example:

In a lodgepole pine stand (species code = 108), the largest tree in the condition is 5.0+ inches

DBH. If at least 20 trees that are 5.0-6.9 inches DBH are found on the four subplots, the minimum stocking of 10 percent (table 5b: 3 rd

row, 1 st

column) is met. In the same condition only

5 tally trees in the 13.0-14.9-inch DBH class are needed to meet minimum stocking of 10 percent.

If the tally were three 5.0-6.9-inch trees and two 13.0-14.9-inch DBH class trees (total stocking of

3 x 0.5 + 2 x 2.2 = 5.9), the combined stocking would not meet the minimum 10 percent (5.9 < 10) and the condition would be classified nonforest.

If there is a transition zone between two conditions use your best judgment to be sure that trees tallied in the transition zone do not have too much weight in the assignment of a land use.

162

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter XIII APPENDICES

Table 5a. Stocking values for all tallied trees on the four subplots and microplots

DBH of the largest tally tree in the condition

DBH of tally tree DBH of tally tree DBH of tally tree

Species

5.0-

6.9

4.0-

4.9

3.0-

3.9

2.0-

2.9

1.0-

1.9

Seedling

4.0-

4.9

3.0-

3.9

2.0-

2.9

1.0-

1.9

Seedling

3.0-

3.9

2.0

-

2.9

1.0-

1.9

Seedling

(019) subalpine fir

(094) white spruce

0.7 6.9 5.2 4.0 2.6 1.2 7.9 6.2 4.6 3.0 1.4 7.6 5.7 3.7 1.8

(095) black spruce

(108) lodgepole pine

DBH of tally tree

2.0-

2.9

1.0

-

1.9

Seedling

DBH of tally tree

1.0-

1.9

Seed

-ling

Seedling

7.4 4.9 2.3 7.2 3.5 7.0

0.7 6.2 4.7 3.6 2.3 1.1 7.1 5.6 4.2 2.7 1.3 6.9 5.1 3.3 1.6 6.7 6.3

0.5 5.0 3.7 2.9 1.9 0.8 5.7 4.5 3.3 2.2 1.0 5.5 4.1 2.7 1.3 5.4 3.5 1.7 5.2 2.5 5.1

(011) Pacific silver fir

(042) AK yellow cedar

(098) Sitka spruce

(231) Pacific yew

(242) western redcedar

(263) western hemlock

(264) mountain hemlock

0.5 4.8 3.6 2.8 1.8 0.8 5.4 4.3 3.2 2.1 1.0 5.3 3.9 2.6 1.2 5.1 4.8

(351) red alder

(375) paper birch

(746) quaking aspen

(747) black cottonwood

1.3 11.7 8.8 6.8 4.4 2.0 13.3 10.6 7.9 5.1 2.4 13.0 9.6 6.3 3.0 12.6 8.3 4.0 12.3 5.9

1.2 10.9 8.3 6.4 4.1 1.9 12.5 9.9 7.3 4.8 2.2 12.1 9.0 5.9 2.8 11.8 7.8 3.7 11.5 5.6

11.9

11.1

163

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter XIII APPENDICES

Table 5b. Stocking values for all trees tallied on the subplot only

5.0-

6.9

7.0-

8.9

9.0-

10.9 Species

(019) subalpine fir

(094) white spruce

(095) black spruce

(108) lodgepole pine

0.7 1.1 1.6

11.0-

12.9

2.1

13.0-

14.9

2.6

15.0-

16.9

3.2

17.0-

18.9

3.8

19.0-

20.9

4.4

21.0-

22.9

5.1

23.0-

24.9

5.8

25.0-

26.9

6.5

27.0-

28.9 29.0+

7.2 8.0

0.7 0.9 1.1 1.4 1.6 1.9 2.1 2.4 2.6 2.9 3.1 3.4 3.6

0.5 0.9 1.3 1.7 2.2 2.8 3.4 4.1 4.8 5.6 6.4 7.3 8.2

(011) Pacific silver fir

(042) Alaska yellow cedar

(098) Sitka spruce

(231) Pacific yew

(242) western redcedar

(263) western hemlock

(264) mountain hemlock

0.5 0.8 1.2 1.6 2.1 2.6 3.2 3.8 4.5 5.2 5.9 6.7 7.5

(351) red alder

(375) paper birch

(746) quaking aspen

(747) black cottonwood

1.3 1.9 2.6 3.3 4.1 5.0 5.9 6.8 7.8 8.9 9.9 11.0 12.1

1.2 1.8 2.5 3.2 4.0 4.9 5.8 6.8 7.8 8.9 10.0 11.1 12.3

164

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter XIII APPENDICES

Appendix 5-- Glossary

Accessible Forest Land – Land that is within sampled area (the population of interest), is accessible and can safely be visited, and meets the following criteria:

(a) the condition is at least 10-percent stocked by trees (appendix 3) of any size or has been at least 10percent stocked in the past. Additionally, the condition is not subject to nonforest use(s) that prevent normal tree regeneration and succession such as regular mowing, grazing, or recreation activities, or

ACTUAL LENGTH – For trees with broken or missing tops. The actual length of the tree is recorded to the nearest

1.0 foot from ground level to the highest remaining portion of the tree still present and attached to the bole. If the top is intact, this item may be omitted. Forked trees should be treated the same as unforked trees.

Agricultural Land – Land managed for crops, pasture, or other agricultural use. Evidence includes geometric field and road patterns, fencing, and the traces produced by livestock or mechanized equipment. The area must be at least 1.0 acre in size and 120.0 feet. wide at the point of occurrence.

ARTIFICIAL REGENERATION SPECIES – Indicates the predominant species that is planted or seeded in an artificially regenerated condition.

Blind check – a re-installation done by a qualified inspection crew without production crew data on hand; a full reinstallation of the plot for the purpose of obtaining a measure of data quality. The two data sets are maintained separately. Discrepancies between the two sets of data are not reconciled. Blind checks are done on production plots only.

Bole – The main stem of a tree, extending from one foot above the ground to the point on the tree where DOB reaches 4 inches

Boundary – The intersection of two or more conditions on a subplot or microplot. Each boundary is described by recording the azimuth and horizontal distance from the subplot or microplot center to the left and right points of where the boundary intersects the perimeter of the subplot or microplot. An azimuth and distance to a corner point may also be described, if one exists. If multiple boundaries exist at a subplot, they are recorded in the order of their occurrence on the subplot, starting from north and proceeding around the compass.

Census Water – Rivers and streams that are more than 200 feet wide and bodies of water that are greater than 4.5 acres in size.

Certification plot – a plot installed by a certification candidate. It may be a training plot or a production plot. The candidate working alone installs the plot.

Cold check – an inspection done either as part of the training process, or as part of the ongoing QC program.

Normally the installation crew is not present at the time of inspection. The inspector has the completed data inhand at the time of inspection. The inspection can include the whole plot or a subset of the plot. Discrepancies between the two sets of data may be reconciled. Cold checks are done on production plots only.

CONDITION CLASS – The combination of discrete landscape and forest attributes that identify and define different strata on the plot. Examples of such attributes include condition status, forest type, stand origin, stand size, owner group, reserve status and stand density.

Cropland – Land under cultivation within the past 24 months, including orchards and land in soil improving crops, but excluding land cultivated in developing improved pasture.

CROWN CLASS – A classification of trees based on dominance in relation to adjacent trees within the stand as indicated by crown development and the amount of sunlight received from above and sides.

Cull – Portions of a tree that are unusable for industrial wood products because of rot, form, or other defect.

165

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter XIII APPENDICES

Diameter at Breast Height (DBH) – The diameter of the bole of a tree at breast height (4.5 feet above the ground), measured outside of the bark.

Diameter Outside Bark (DOB) – A diameter that may be taken at various points on a tree, or log, outside of the bark. Diameter Outside Bark is often estimated.

Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) – A unique code identifying U.S. States and counties (or units in Alaska).

Forest Industry Land – Land owned by companies or individuals that operate wood-using plants.

Forest Trees – Plants having a well-developed, woody stem and usually more than 12 feet in height at maturity.

FOREST TYPE – A classification of forest land based upon the trees or tree communities that constitute the majority of stocking on the site.

Hot check – an inspection normally done as part of the training process. The inspector is present on the plot with the trainee and provides immediate feedback regarding data quality. Data errors are corrected. Hot checks can be done on training plots or production plots.

Idle Farmland -- Former cropland or pasture that has not been tended within the last 2 years and that has less than 10 percent stocking with live trees.

Improved Pasture -- Land that is currently maintained and used for grazing. Evidence of maintenance, besides the degree of grazing, includes condition of fencing, presence of stock ponds, periodic brush removal, seeding, irrigation, or mowing.

Inclusion – An area that would generally would be recognized as a separate condition, except that it is not large enough to qualify. For example, a ½ acre pond within a forested stand.

Industrial Wood – All roundwood products, except firewood.

Inspection crew – a crew of qualified QC/QA individuals whose primary responsibility is the training, certification and inspection of production crews.

Land Area – As defined by the Bureau of the Census: The area of dry land and land temporarily or partially covered by water such as marshes, swamps, and river flood plains (omitting tidal flats below mean tide); streams, sloughs, estuaries and canals less than 200 feet in width, and ponds less than 4.5 acres in area.

Maintained Road – Any road, hard topped or other surfaces, that is plowed or graded periodically and capable of use by a large vehicle. Rights-of-way that are cut or treated to limit herbaceous growth are included in this area.

Marsh – Low, wet areas characterized by heavy growth of weeds and grasses and an absence of trees.

Measurement Quality Objective (MQO) – Describes the acceptable tolerance for each data element. MQOs consist of two parts: a statement of the tolerance and a percentage of time when the collected data are required to be within tolerance.

Merchantable Top – The point on the bole of trees above which merchantable material cannot be produced.

Merchantable top is 4.0 inches for all species.

Microplot – A circular, fixed-radius plot with a radius of 6.8 feet that is used to sample trees less than 5.0 inches at

DBH, as well as other vegetation.

National Forest Land – Federal lands which have been legally designated as National Forests or purchase units, and other lands under the administration of the Forest Service, including experimental areas and Bankhead-Jones

Title III lands.

166

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter XIII APPENDICES

Native American (Indian) Land – Tribal lands held in fee, or trust, by the Federal government but administered for

Indian tribal groups and Indian trust allotments. This land is considered “Private Lands”, Owner Group 40.

Non-census Water – Bodies of water from 1 to 4.5 acres in size and water courses from 30 feet to 200 feet in width.

Nonforest Land -- Land that does not support, or has never supported, forests, and lands formerly forested where use for timber management is precluded by development for other uses. Includes areas used for crops, improved pasture, residential areas, city parks, improved roads of any width and adjoining rights-of-way, power line clearings of any width, and noncensus water. If intermingled in forest areas, unimproved roads and nonforest strips must be more than 120.0 feet wide, and clearings, etc., more than one acre in size, to qualify as nonforest land.

Nonstockable – Areas of forest land that are not capable of supporting trees because of the presence of rock, water, etc.

Other Federal Lands – Federal land other than National Forests. These include lands administered by the USDI

Bureau of Land Management, USDI National Park Service, USDI Fish and Wildlife Service, Department of

Defense, Department of Energy, Army Corps of Engineers, and military bases.

OWNER CLASS -- A variable that classifies land into fine categories of ownership.

OWNER GROUP – A variable that classifies land into broad categories of ownership; Forest Service, Other Federal

Agency, State and Local Government, and Private. Differing categories of Owner Group on a plot require different conditions.

Phase 1 (P1) – FIA activities done as part of remote-sensing and/or aerial photography.

Phase 2 (P2) – FIA activities done on the network of ground plots formerly known as FIA plots.

Phase 3 (P3) – FIA activities done on a subset of Phase 2 plots formerly known as Forest Health Monitoring plots.

Additional ecological indicator information is collected from Phase 3 plots.

Plot – A cluster of four subplots that samples approximately 1/6 acre. The subplots are established so that subplot

1 is centered within the sample and the centers of subplots 2, 3,and 4 are located 120.0 feet from the center of subplot 1 at azimuths of 360, 120, and 240 degrees, respectively. Each subplot has an associated microplot and annular plot

Plurality - a majority, for example; if there are three tree species distributed throughout a condition, the species with the majority of stocking in the condition would be considered the FOREST TYPE species for that condition.

PRIVATE OWNER INDUSTRIAL STATUS – Indicates whether Private land owners own and operate a wood processing plant.

Production crew – a crew containing at least one certified individual. The crew is involved in routine installation of plots.

Production plot – a plot that belongs to the 6000-acre grid database. It may also be used for training purposes.

REGENERATION STATUS – A stand descriptor that indicates whether a stand has been naturally or artificially regenerated.

Reserved Land – Land that is withdrawn from timber utilization by a public agency or by law.

RESERVE STATUS – An indication of whether the land in a condition has been reserved.

Saplings – Live trees 1.0 to 4.9 inches DBH.

Seedlings – Live trees less than 1.0 DBH that are at least one foot tall.

167

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter XIII APPENDICES

STAND AGE – A stand descriptor that indicates the average age of the live trees not overtopped in the predominant stand size-class of a condition.

STAND DENSITY – A stand descriptor that indicates the relative tree density of a condition class. The classification is based on the number of stems/unit area, basal area, tree cover, or stocking of all live trees in the condition which are not overtopped, compared to any previously defined condition class tree density.

STAND SIZE – A stand descriptor that indicates which size-class of trees that are not overtopped constitutes the majority of stocking in the stand.

State, County and Municipal Lands – Lands owned by states, counties, and local public agencies or municipalities, or lands leased to these government units for 50 years or more.

Stocking – The relative degree of occupancy land by trees, measured as basal area or the number of trees in a stand by size or age and spacing, compared to the basal area or number of trees required to fully utilize the growth potential of the land; that is, the stocking standard.

Subplot – A circular, fixed-area plot with a radius of 24.0 feet. Each subplot represents ¼ of the fixed plot sample unit.

TOTAL LENGTH – The total length of the tree, recorded to the nearest 1.0 foot from ground level to the tip of the apical meristem. For trees growing on a slope, measure on the uphill side of the tree. If the tree has a broken or missing top, the total length is estimated to what the length would be if there were no missing or broken top.

Forked trees should be treated the same as unforked trees

Training plot – a plot established for training or certification purposes only. It does NOT belong to the 6000-acre grid database.

Transition Zone – An area where a distinct boundary between two or more different conditions cannot be determined.

168

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter XIII APPENDICES

Appendix 6--Cubic Foot Volume Table

1

1.5

2

2.5

3

3.5

4

4.5

5

5.5

6

6.5

7

PERCENT DISTRIBUTION OF CUBIC FOOT VOLUME

1.5

Log Postion (volume/ 8ft. section)

2 2.5

3 3.5

4 4.5

5 5.5

31

27

25

22

20

0.5

52

44

36

19

18

17

15

14

15

17

17

17

15

14

14

13

12

11

11

11

26

22

20

18

17

1

43

36

29

15

14

13

13

12

14

13

13

13

12

11

10

10

9

9

9

9

10

10

10

10

10

10

9

9

9

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

9

8

7

7

8

8

7

6

7

8

6

6

6

6

6

5

6 4

6

6

5

6

6

5

5

4

5

5

4

4

3

4 3

3

3

6 6.5

7

2

2 2

169

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter XIII APPENDICES

Appendix 7--Forms

PLOT LEVEL DATA FORM

STATE: ____________ PLOT # ________________ DATE ____/____/____

Item# Description

4

5

PLOT ATTRIBUTES

AK SAMPLE KIND

AK DATA SOURCE

.

.

.

.

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

PLOT NONSAMPLED REASON (Plot Nons Rsn)

CONDITION CLASS STATUS 1 (CC1 Status)

NonS Land Cvr

PREVIOUS PLOT NUMBER (Prev Plt Num)

AK START DATE

HORIZONTAL DISTANCE TO IMPROVED ROAD

WATER ON PLOT (Water Plot)

. .

.

. . .

. . . . .

. ./. ./. . . .

.

.

.

15 AK CREW LEADER (Crew Lead)

16 AK CREW MEMBER NAME 1

AK CREW MEMBER NAME 2

AK CREW MEMBER NAME 3

AK CREW MEMBER NAME 4

AK CREW MEMBER NAME 5

17 AK Landowner plot summary request (Own Request)

18 AK END DATE

19 AK P2/P3 PLOT TYPE

20 PLOT LEVEL NOTES

DOWNLOADED INFO (Not to be updated)

21 AK OLD LOCATION ID (Old Loc ID)

22

23

25

26

27

DATE OF PREVIOUS INVENTORY

FIELD GUIDE VERSION (Core Man Ver)

GPS INFO

AK GPS LOCATION TYPE (L)

GPS UNIT TYPE (T)

GPS SERIAL NUMBER (ID/Ser#)

28 COORDINATE SYSTEM (C)

29 AK GPS LATITUDE DEGREES (Lt)

30 AK GPS LATITUDE MINUTES

31 AK GPS LONGITUDE DEGREES (Long)

32

33

34

35

AK GPS LONGITUDE MINUTES

NUMBER OF READINGS (Num)

GPS ERROR (Err)

GPS ELEVATION (Elevat)

36 AZIMUTH TO PLOT CENTER (Azm)

. .

. . . . .

. . .

. . . . .

. . .

. . .

. . . . . .

. . .

. . .

.

. ./. ./. . . .

.

. . . . . . .

. ./. ./. . . .

. .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . .

. .

. . . . .

. . .

. . . . .

. . .

. . .

. . . . . .

. .

. . . . .

. . .

. . . . .

. . .

. . .

. . . . . .

. . .

. . . 37 DISTANCE TO PLOT CENTER (Dist)

38 AK GPS NOTES

RP INFO

39 AK RP TYPE

40 AK RP SPECIES (Spc)

41 AK RP DIAMETER (Diam)

42 AK RP AZIMUTH (Azm)

43 AK RP HORIZONTAL DISTANCE (Dist)

44 AK RP AZ/DIST TO SUBPLOT # (S)

45 AK RP NOTES

. . .

. . .

.

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . . .

.

171

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter XIII APPENDICES

1

CONDITION CLASS DATA FORM

________________ ____/____/____

CONDITION CLASS NUMBER 1 2 3 4 5 6

12

13

14

15

9

10

11

6

7

8

4

5

2

3

CONDITION CLASS STATUS

CONDITION NONSAMPLED REASON

AK estimated non-sample land cover type

RESERVED STATUS

OWNER GROUP

FOREST TYPE

STAND SIZE CLASS

REGENERATION STATUS

TREE DENSITY

ANCILLARY (Non-delineating) VARIABLES

OWNER CLASS

ARTYIFICIAL REGENERATION STATUS

DISTURBANCE

DISTURBANCE YEAR 1

DISTURBANCE 2

19

20

21

22

16

17

18

DISTURBANCE YEAR 2

DISTURBANCE 3

DISTURBANCE YEAR 3

TREATMENT 1

TREATMENT YEAR 1

TREATMENT 2

TREATMENT YEAR 2

23

24

25

TREATMENT 3

TREATMENT YEAR 3

PHYSIOGRAPHIC CLASS

26 AK PRESENT NON-FOREST LAND USE

27 AK Condition Class Notes-

. .

. . . .

. .

. . . .

. .

. .

. . . .

. . . .

. .

. . . .

. .

. .

. . . .

. .

. . .

. .

. . .

.

.

.

.

. . .

. .

.

. .

. .

. . . .

. .

. . . .

. .

. .

. . . .

. . . .

. .

. . . .

. .

. .

. . . .

. .

. . .

. .

. . .

.

.

.

.

. . .

. .

.

. .

. .

. . . .

. .

. . . .

. .

. .

. . . .

. . . .

. .

. . . .

. .

. .

. . . .

. .

. . .

. .

. . .

.

.

.

.

. . .

. .

.

. .

. .

. . . .

. .

. . . .

. .

. .

. . . .

. . . .

. .

. . . .

. .

. .

. . . .

. .

. . .

. .

. . .

.

.

.

.

. . .

. .

.

. .

. .

. . . .

. .

. . . .

. .

. .

. . . .

. . . .

. .

. . . .

. .

. .

. . . .

. .

. . .

. .

. . .

.

.

.

.

. . .

. .

.

. .

. .

. . . .

. .

. . . .

. .

. .

. . . .

. . . .

. .

. . . .

. .

. .

. . . .

. .

. . .

. .

. . .

.

.

.

.

. . .

. .

.

. .

172

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter XIII APPENDICES

SUBPLOT INFORMATION DATA FORM

________________ ____/____/____

1 2 3 4

SUBPLOT ATTRIBUTES

2 SUBPLOT PLOT STATUS (Subplt Status)

3 SUBPLOT NONSAMPLED REASON (NonS Reason)

4 AK estimated nonsample land cover type (NonS Land Cvr)

5 SUBPLOT CENTER CONDITION

7 SUBPLOT SLOPE (Slope)

8 SUBPLOT ASPECT (Aspect)

9 SNOW/WATER DEPTH (Snow/Water Dept)

10 P3 POINT STATUS

.

.

. . .

.

.

. . .

. . .

. .

.

.

.

. . .

.

.

. . .

. . .

. .

.

.

.

. . .

.

.

. . .

. . .

. .

.

.

.

. . .

.

.

. . .

. . .

. .

.

SUBPLOT MAPPING/BOUNDARY DATA

2 PLOT TYPE (P)

3 AK BOUNDARY CHANGE (B)

4 CONTRASTING CONDITION (C)

5 LEFT AZIMUTH (LAzm)

6 RIGHT AZIMUTH (RAzm)

7 CORNER AZIMUTH (CAzm)

8 CORNER DISTANCE (CDist)

9 AK BOUNDARY NOTES

.

.

. . . .

. . . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. .

.

.

. . .

. . .

. . .

. .

.

.

. . .

. . .

. . .

. .

.

.

. . .

. . .

. . .

. .

SEEDLING DATA

1 SUBPLOT NUMBER . . . .

2 SPECIES

3 CONDITION CLASS NUMBER

. . .

.

. . .

.

. . .

.

. . .

.

SUBPLOT # Æ 1 2 3 4

4 AK seedling count, length class 1 CC1 CC2 CC3 CC1 CC2 CC3 CC1 CC2 CC3 CC1 CC2 CC3

Species:

5 AK seedling count, length class 2 CC1 CC2 CC3 CC1 CC2 CC3 CC1 CC2 CC3 CC1 CC2 CC3

Species:

6 AK seedling count, length class 3 CC1 CC2 CC3 CC1 CC2 CC3 CC1 CC2 CC3 CC1 CC2 CC3

Species:

7 AK seedling count, length class 4 CC1 CC2 CC3 CC1 CC2 CC3 CC1 CC2 CC3 CC1 CC2 CC3

Species:

8 AK seedling notes-

173

Annual Inventory 2004

Chapter XIII APPENDICES

TREE AND SAPLING DATA FORM

________________ ____/____/____ PAGE

1 x

2 xxx

3 x

Tree Notes:

4 x

5 x

7 x

6 x

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 x xxx xxx xxx xxx xx.y xx.y xx.y xxx xxx.y x xxx xxx x xxx xx x xx x x xxxx xx

30

174

Annual Inventory of Coastal Alaska Location Record

Chapter XIII APPENDICES

PLOT NUMBER: START DATE: / / END DATE: / /

CREW LEADER: CREW MEMBERS:

RP DATA

Species

Diameter in.

Azimuth

Slope dist. ft.

To subplot

RP LOCATION AND TRAVEL DESCRIPTION:

PRESENT CONDITION / PAST DISTURBANCE

LOCATION CHECKLIST:

___ Monumentation:

___Witness

___RP

___GPS coordinates collected

(LZ, RP, PC)

___Condition Class

___Tree Record

(seedling)

___Photo work

(pinprick, data on back)

___Site Trees

___Plot level data

LOCATION SKETCH MAP:

2

175

4

1

3

N

Download